Home

CONTROLLER/DATA RECORDER

1. 5 Tele THE USE OF TOUCH SCREEN iu susu au EE EEan 6 2 GENERAL CHARAGCTERIS5T IICCSiu u uuu assqssschusqussss agsssiutusanspasunkukayasasausaqusahasaskaquqshahaq 6 JS TECHNICAL DATA o u u vs ence ee ee ee ee ee 9 A DEVICE INSTALRLLATIONuu 10 11 Te AD m ARE 22 CONNECTION METHOD 14 uu uuu temor 17 31 5 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 31 5 1 UNDERSTANDING CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 31 D MP T C i MNT TTE 32 e SS 34 5 2 HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS 35 6 WORKING WITH THE CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 36 6 1 CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER POWER UP sss nnn nnns 36 52 THE USE OP THE TOUCH SCREEN a e den ados opos bise Eod As PEERS E ERRARE ARM 36 p 36 us M fA 6 3 2 I AVG eco C 38 0 3 3 pan
2. Register type Register number Data format 1 32 bit reading 4 Ordering Data shift Data mask 62 Output register Register type Write mode Register number Data format 32 bit reading Data shift Data mask Channel value register Decimal point Dec point register 4 1 4 hannel status HI HI state O Channel status LO LO value Channel status WAIT WAIT state WAIT register WAIT value Channel status ERR ERR state 4 1 4 Edit buttons General settings Logical channels Built in inputs External outputs Profiles timers Controllers Modbus Network settings Configuration files Enter licence key Firmware update Remote display User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 7 GENERAL SETTINGS MENU Device configuration General settings Logical channels Built in inputs Built in outputs External outputs Profiles timers Controllers Groups Modbus Network settings Access options The General settings menu allows to configure user interface display settings the default screen when the device powers on and automatic view cha
3. 16 bits Slave device registers description is shown if Tab 7 10 217 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Register Range Register description 01h 0 0x0FFFFh Set point value younger word of 32 bits float value 02h 0 0x0FFFFh Set point value older word of 32 bits float value 04h 0 1 Valve position 0 closed 1 open 08h In first step touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button 218 enter using 0 1 Alarm state 0 off 1 on Tab 7 10 Description of 16 bits Slave device registers the Modbus menu the arrows in upper right corner choose Port number 1 MB1 in accordance with Fig 7 129 Mode parameter set as MASTER Baud rate parameter set as 19200 bits sec it should be the same as in the SLAVE device Format parameter set as 8N1 in Request timeout parameter write 0 2 sec in Request retrials parameter write 3 press Slave devices button e using the arrows in upper right corner select Modbus address of Slave device in this case 5 e Device type parameter set as defined e Device name parameter write Flowmeter e the Device channels parameter block press the Output list button to define the register to write if the Output list is empty press the sign to add output channel if the list has defined the output channels use the arrows in the upper right corner to select the
4. Input 4 20 LED current 50 i bw Input 4 20mA LED current regulator F 50mA ji NC lt q Interface lt gt Main board Input 4 20mA LED current regulator O NC 50 Input 4 20 current regulator O Bw 50 Input 4 20 LED current regulator F 50mA N Fig 8 9 Internal structure of the optoisolated current input module 236 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 5 FI2 Fl4 FT2 FLOWMETER MODULES FI2 2 flowmeter inputs 2 current inputse in01 0M1 2x 0 20mA n02 C e2 flowmeters 3 2 x 0 20mA n03 eN 05 GND FI4 4 flowmeter inputs 4 current inputs FT2 4 x 0 20mA flowmeters 4 x 0 20mA IN3 n08 INA 109 GND 2 pulse inputs 2 current inputs n01 lt Inp11 02 Inp12 03 lt com1 04 Inp21 n05 Inp22 06 lt 2 2 x 0 20mA Fig 8 10 Flowmeter modules Most important parameters of F modules FT4 4 pulse inputs 4 current inputs 4 x 0 20mA
5. nnne nnns 88 7 8 5 Logical Channels Set point value eene nnns 91 7 8 6 Logical Channels Math function mode esses seien 94 7 8 7 Logical Channels Controller mode isses essen nnne nnn nnns 104 7 8 8 Logical Channels Profile timer 106 7 8 9 Logical Channels Profile timer cycle counter mode 108 7 8 10 Logical Channels Data from other channel mode 109 7 8 11 Examples of Logical Channels 110 F9 BUILTIN INPUT S ieee 134 7 9 1 Built in inputs General settings eese esee eene nnne nnne nnne nnn nans 134 7 9 2 Built in inputs Input 136 7 9 3 Built in inputs Binary input Inp X2 Digital 24V 136 7 9 4 Built in inputs Demo input numbered X4 X5 137 7 9 5 Built in inputs Modules 138 7 9 5 1 Voltage and current measurement modules
6. 39 6 3 4 Important messages a 42 7 CONFIGURATION OF THE CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 43 UEN MT Y kausa 43 7 2 MAIN MENU SELECTION PANEL eiit REFERRE SERA ERENER EEAS AEAEE kak 46 7 3 FILES LhUUNCEU s 47 7 4 DEVICE INFORMATION LICENCE FIRMWARE UPDATE REMOTE DISPLAY EXPORT MANUAL AND RENEW CONFIGURATION 53 1 DEVICE CONFIGURA TION HG noa tacui eo bad edge oA khu lae ue Eee lead ads 56 7 6 CONFIGURATION MENU STRUCTURE sss 59 PrOGENERAE SETIN GOS ep DM metae wass aane arte 63 TG COGICAL CHANNEL M 66 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings a nnn ans 66 7 8 2 Logical channels Hardware input nna 83 7 8 3 Logical Channels Hardware output monitor mode 86 7 8 4 Logical Channels Modbus mode
7. 2010 08 04 10 26 33 4209 2010 08 04 10 26 44 4179 2010 08 04 10 27 13 2649 29 gt 2010 08 04 10 27 24 2409 2010 08 04 10 27 34 2409 0000FA3D 2010 08 04 10 27 44 2409 ODODFA47 2010 08 04 10 27 54 2409 QOOOFAS1 2010 08 04 10 28 04 2409 Fig 8 37 partX db_timestamp file view example If file has suffix samples then it contains logged samples 1 IDS unique hexadecimal id of sample in log 2 7 floating point value of logged channel in a group see file log db chan conf Every line in this file contains maximal 7 columns 276 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 0000F9DE gt 3 0000 14 8750 5 7825 3 0000 14 8750 5 78259 0000FSDF gt 3 0000 gt 13 4500 4 1751 3 0000 13 4500 4 1751T O000FSEO 3 0000 11 866523 1682 3 0000 11 8665 3 1682T 0000FSE1 3 0000 10 2831 3 0750 3 0000 10 2831 3 07509 0000FSE2 3 0000 8 7000 3 9042 3 0000 8 7000 3 90429 0000FSE3 3 0000 gt 7 1164 gt 5 5751 3 0000 7 1164 gt 5 57511 0000F9E4 3 0000 5 5332 7 9236 3 0000 5 5332 7 92369 0000F9ES 3 0000 gt 3 9497 10 7204 3 0000 gt 3 9497 10 72044 OOOOFSE6 gt 22 0000 3 9500 13 6906 22 0000 3 9500 13 63064 0000F9E7 x 22 0000 6 3248 16 5447 22 0000 6 3248 16 54479 0000F9E8 gt 22 0000 8 6998 19 0030 22 0000 8 6998 13 00304
8. ML A 20 17 51 40 180 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Fig 6 10 Examples of Needle Dials for 3 channels and for 5 channels 41 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Index of displayed groups 2009 05 31 17 44 34 Position mm LO L leating 29 3 TOUCH THE 5 TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Group 02 G 06 Torque Y p 1 w x 61 7 28 64 5 135 LO LO Heating Position a orque gt lt 550 pex LO 28 64 61 7 5 135 JDeviation x iii iii output LO LO e T Y OR 21 Fig 6 11 Examples of simultaneous presentation of Many Groups There is also the possibility to show many groups on a single screen Fig 6 11 In this mode channels belonging to the same group are displayed under one another and groups are placed side by side As much as 5 groups can be displayed simultaneously on a single screen for example groups starting from group 8 will display on the screen starting from the left side of the page groups 8 9 10 1 2 See Chapter 7 14 GROUPS for more information about Groups 6 3 4 Important messages The user will sometimes be asked informed and alerted about a variety of events by messages displayed on the screen Figures show below Fig 6 12 Fig 6 15 present examples of message types Q Configuration has been read o Update firm
9. FI2 14 FT2 FT4 Number of inputs 2xF flowmeters 2xl 4xF flowmeters Axl 2xT tachometers 2xl 4xT tachometers 4xl Hardware limitations current inputs 24mA OmA 24mA 2mA 30mA 2mA 30mA Hardware resolution current inputs 1uA 1 1 1uA Precision current inputs 0 1 25 C 0 1 25 C 0 1 25 C 0 1 25 C Covered type max type max type max type max CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 0 20mA 0 22mA 0 20mA 0 22 0 20mA 0 20 0 20mA 0 22mA 4 20 4 22mA 4 20 4 22 4 20 4 20 4 20 4 22 measurement ranges Temperature stability 50 ppm C 50 ppm C 50 ppm C 50 ppm C Internal impedance current inputs type 1000 type 1000 type 1000 type 1000 Protection current inputs 50mA auto reset fuse 50mA auto reset fuse 50mA auto reset fuse 50mA auto reset fuse 237 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Input signals voltage levels logical LOW state logical HIGH state Uin lt 1V Uin gt 10V Uin lt 1V Uin 10V Max input voltage 30V 30V Sampling period 50 50 input frequency 50kHz 50 2 Totalizer capacity 1 000 000 000 000 1 000 000 000 000 1 000 000 000 000 1 000 000 000 000 Isolation strength 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC
10. PASSIVE c par PASSIVE c gt PASSIVE c PASSIVE c N PASSIVE c 29 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER ACM ETU USB No isolated A USB USB USB host host host RJ 45 RJ 45 ETH ETH Fig 4 22 Communication Modules GND LO RS232 RS485 3 lt orUSB RS485 x interface Fig 4 23 Connection of RS 485 transmission signals The CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER device supports the following converters USB RS 485 converter 5 232 RS 485 converter 30 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 4 4 MAINTENANCE The unit does not have any internal replaceable or adjustable components available to the user Pay attention to the ambient temperature in the room where the unit is operating Excessively high temperatures cause faster ageing of the internal components and shorten the fault free time of the unit s operation In cases where the unit gets dirty do not clean with solvents For cleaning use warm water with small amount of detergent or in the case of more significant contamination ethyl or isopropyl alcohol A Using any other agents can cause permanent damage to the housing 74 Product marked with this symbol should not be placed in municipal waste Please fN check local regulations for disposal of electronic
11. Logging of the data in the device is hardware limited so the producer recommends to limit the logging to less than 200 samples per second e g at the maximum sampling frequency of 0 1 sec user should not log more than 20 Logical channels at one time Failure to comply with these restrictions may cause the device to slow down Logging options parameter block e e 196 Mode defines way of triggering group logging e disabled logging of selection Group is disabled e always logging is continuous in time e from log channel this option activate new parameter Triggering source which enables logging the data when the value of Triggering source gt 0 Triggering source this parameter is visible for Mode from log channel in this parameter user can choose a logical channel from list and selected one will be triggering source for this group logging is active when value in selected channel is gt 0 Description user can set a description of a data logging file by pressing the button next to the Description label and then setting any text Base period and Base unit this parameters set duration of the sample of data logging these parameters have the following options e unit second gt duration form 0 1 to 3600 sec e unit minute gt duration form 0 1 to 1440 minute e unit hour gt duration form 0 1 to 24 hour Alternative mode this mode allows the user to log data in special situation w
12. 138 7 9 5 2 Mixed UIN UID modules 138 7 9 5 3 Isolated current inputs module 140 7 9 5 4 Analogue flowmeter modules eene nnn nna 140 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 9 5 5 Pulse flowmeter modules nares na 141 7 9 5 6 Thermocouples sensor measurement modules 142 7 9 5 7 RTD measurement modules 143 7 9 5 8 Isolated universal inputs modules 144 7 9 5 9 Optoisolated digital inputs modules 145 7 9 5 10 Optoisolated universal counters modules 145 7 9 5 11 Optoizolated hourmeters modules 146 RENI NE COT XE 149 7 10 1 Built in outputs General 5 149 7 10 2 Built in Output Relays Sound signal Virtual relays TOT 7 10 3 Build in output PWM Pulse
13. Inp22 32 42o Prg2 3 4 Res2 3 4 COM 2 3 4o Interface lt lt lt lt p Main board Fig 8 18 Internal structure of the optoisolated Universal counters modules 222 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 11 HM2 HM4 OPTOIZOLATED HOURMETERS MODULES HM2 2 hourmeters START STOP 1 PRG 1 COM 1 n04 lt START STOP 2 n05 lt PRG2 n08 com2 HM4 4 hourmeters START STOP 1 PRG 1 COM 1 START STOP 2 2 lt 2 07 START STOP 3 lt START STOP 4 lt PRG 4 lt COM 4 Fig 8 19 Optoizolated hourmeters modules Most important parameters of HM2 and HM4 modules HM2 4 Number of inputs 2 hourmeters 4 hourmeters Terminal description START STOP n input which starts and stops time counting PRG n programmable inputs CONM n common inputs START STOP n input which starts and stops time counting PRG n programmable inputs COM n common inputs n 1 2 n 1 2 3 4 Input signals voltage levels logical LOW state logical HIGH state Uin lt 1V Uin lt 1V Uin 2 10V Uin gt 10V Max input frequency 1kHz 1kHz Max input voltage 30V 30V Input current consumption about 14mA 24V about 6mA 10V about 14mA 24V about 6mA 10V Insulati
14. Profiles timers MENU Device configuration mmg Controllers Groups Modbus Network settings Access options Although most controlling processes can be realised using simple ON OFF mode there is sometimes necessity to use more advanced methods to control the actuators The MultiCon has implemented proportional integral derivative controllers PID controllers which is a generic control loop feedback mechanism controller by calculating an error value as the difference between a measured process variable and a desired setpoint The controller attempts to minimize the error by adjusting the process control outputs In the device there is 8 independent settings of PID type controllers available 7 13 1 Controllers General settings In the system there are 8 independent settings of PID type Controllers available which can by used by any Logical channel switched in Controller mode see Chapter 7 8 7 Logical Channels Controller mode The window with basic parameters of the Controller shown on Fig 7 107 Controller 5 1t Controller name Conroler3 Mode PID Dead zone 05 Controller parameters P coefficient 5 w Fig 107 Main configuration of an Controller profile Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allow switching A b between controllers to configure settings of controller parameters The middle button allows direct selection of specific control
15. Pt500 3 wire Nam Inp B1 RTD Mode Hard input T Pt1000 Mode Pt100 Low Limit 100 C High Limit 600 C Unit C a Pt1000 3 wire Configure source C Cu50 Source configuration 50 3 wire 1 Thermocouple Cu100 Thermocouple K Unit C Cu100 3 wire pm Mode Thermocouple pee C Thermocouple J Cu 50 3 wire Low Limit 200 C T Thermocouple T ici Cu 100 Thermocouple N High Limit 1370 C Cu 100 3 wire Thermocouple R Resistance 0 3000 C Resistance 0 3kQ C Resistance 0 3000 3 wire Thermocouple B C Thermocouple E Thermocouple L GOST Resistance 0 3kQ 3 wire C Voltage 325mV C Voltage 3100mV EJEA Fig 7 43 Change source configuration for different types of modules b built in digital input is always designated as Inp X2 Digital 24V The device has a built in digital input which can be used for example as a switch for a process Descriptions of parameters is shown in Chapter 7 9 3 Built in inputs Binary input Inp X2 Digital 24V c built in Demo input numbered Inp X3 Demo Inp X4 Demo Inp X5 Demo The device has 3 built in simulation Demo inputs which can be defined by the user Descriptions of parameters is presented in Chapter 7 9 4 Built in inputs Demo input numbered X3 X4 X5 channel and if user will change parameters in one of these channels that will results D User should rememb
16. OmA 24 Hardware resolution voltage inputs current inputs 1mV 1 1mV 1 1 voltage inputs current inputs 0 1 25 0 1 25 0 1 25 C 0 1 25 C 0 1 25 0 1 25 Covered CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges type max type max type max type 0 5V 1 5V 0 10V 2 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA 0 6 0 6 0 12V 0 12V 0 22 4 22 0 5V 1 5V 0 10V 2 10 0 20mA 4 20mA 0 6 0 6 0 12 0 12 0 22 4 22 0 5V 1 5V 0 6 0 6 0 10 0 12 2 10V 0 12 0 20mA 4 20 Temperature stability 50 ppm C 50 ppm C 50 ppm C 50 ppm C Internal impedance voltage inputs current inputs 50kO type 1000 50kO type 1000 type 1000 Protection voltage inputs current inputs no 50mA auto reset fuse no 50mA auto reset fuse 50mA auto reset fuse Sampling period 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms Isolation strength 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC Weight 32g 43g 42g 42 5g Measurement ranges are limited by software upon hardware inputs ability check current list of CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges at producer s website Tab 8 2 Technical data for the module 14 U16 116 228 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER
17. point register Selecting this value a new field Decimal point register will appear in the Channel value block e Decimal point register allows the user to select the SLAVE device s register containing information about decimal point position Using this parameter the Channel value is being displayed according to formula data of Value register 10 Decimal point register See Chapter 7 15 3 3 Modbus MASTER Register settings for more info Channel status Hl parameter block allows to define when a status HI should be displayed returned in a place of numerical value of Input Channel e Hl state defines condition for Hl state appearance X never do not display status for this option other parameters of Channel status HI block are invisible if register value state HI is returned if data read from HI register equals to HI value parameter if register value state Hl is returned if data read from HI register differs from HI value parameter e Hl register allows the user to select a status register to be read see above e value allow the user to define the value being returned corresponding to status Hl see above For other blocks Channel status LO Channel status WAIT Channel status ERR parameters and their configuration are analogous When a Logical channel is configured to Modbus mode then while reading the registe
18. template name X This button allows the user to delete selected template e Navigation keys allows the user to select appropriate template 7 15 3 2 Modbus MASTER Device channels parameter block This block includes following buttons Input list submenu where the user can define logical channels with chosen write registers Output list submenu where the user can define logical channels with chosen read registers Both these submenus has basic icons presented below Their functions are as follow This button allows the user to add a new Input Output to Input list Output list This button allows the user to delete the Input Output from Input list Output list Arrows placed the upper right corner of the screen allows user to ESEJ switch between Inputs Outputs The middle button moves directly to specific Input Output channel selected from the list 209 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Input List submenu When at least one Input Channel is added to the Input list then an Input channel menu is displayed This menu consist of following fields 210 Channel value parameters block composed of buttons e Value register menu where the details of the Modbus register serving data of input being can be set see Chapter 7 15 3 3 Modbus MASTER Register settings Decimal point list of available decimal point positions in a last place there is an option
19. Base unit Output unit Mode Hardwaer input Wire compensation LI Point 1 Source Compensation mode Mode Input value Configure source Actual temperature Low limit Output value CIA e E Mode Hard out monitor compensate High limit Compensation _ Wire compensation Input value 1 Mode Modbus Totalizer Output value paar EES Port Offset a I Totalizer Scaling offset SLAVE device Value to add Device input EL D Reset mode a UDE Scaling user char Modo S Base unit Output unit Weit Resetsource et point value Num of points IT E Strobe mode Edit button Wigan PME I Low limit Edit points ere i w gie a Counting direction High limit Edit range high I Function mode Input value Mode Math function E l gt Output value Function Function Reset now Mode C
20. Graph high parameter write 1370 C The next step is to define Groups set up logical channels to view them in two windows on the screen To do this enter the Group menu to enable the Group 1 if it is off in Name write Measure Temp 1 for Channels block parameters Slot 1 parameter set as logical channel 9 called the Mean value Slot2 parameter set as logical channel 1 called the Temperature 1 e Slot 3 parameter set as logical channel 2 called the Temperature 2 Slot 4 parameter set as logical channel 3 called the Temperature 3 Slot 5 parameter set as logical channel 4 called the Temperature 4 Slot 6 parameter set as logical channel 5 called the Temperature 5 all other parameters in this Group should be on default settings using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Group except 1 such as 2 in Name parameter write Measure Temp 2 for Channels block parameters Slot 1 parameter set as logical channel 6 called the Temperature 6 Slot2 parameter set as logical channel 7 called the Temperature 7 Slot 3 parameter set as logical channel 8 called the Temperature 8 Slot 4 6 parameter set as disabled all other parameters in this Group should be on default settings The last step is to define the Initial view displayed on the LCD screen when the device starts Initial View has to display a defined group of logical channels in values mode To do this enter Ge
21. Weight 36g 42 5g 42g CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges at producer s website 238 Tab 8 6 Technical data for the module FI2 FT2 49g Measurement ranges are limited by software upon hardware inputs ability check current list of User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER TC4 4 thermocouple inputs Ee pe Ps ins ee IN T TC8 8 thermocouple inputs pees pe s e n13 IN7 n14 TC12 12 thermocouple inputs ae gt gt IN1 EE gt gt IN2 gt m n08 n09 IN 5 1 nat Q IN T n13 7 IN7 14 Pal y IN12 Fig 8 11 Thermocouple module TC4 TC8 TC12 8 6 TC4 TC8 TC12 THERMOCOUPLE SENSOR MEASUREMENT MODULES 239 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Most important parameters of TC4 TC8 and TC12 modules TC4 TC8 TC12 Number of inputs 4 8 12 Hardware limitations 30mV 30mV 30mV 30mV 30mV 30mV 120mV 120mV 120mV 120mV 120mV 120mV Hardware resolution range 30mV 1uV 1uV 1uV range 120mV 4uV 4uV 4uV Voltage measurement precision 0 196 25 0 1 25 0 1 25 Permissible Long time overload 20 20 20 Permissible voltage difference between channels Covered CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges K S J T N R L GOST thermocouple 0 5V 0 5V 0 5V 10 25mV voltage
22. outside range if the input data is outside the defined range at the output we get high state Hysteresis this parameter defines offset for switch state on the output Timing parameter block see Fig 7 85 The parameters of this block include e ON delay it is the time that must pass from the time of switch request to actual switch from low state to high state see Fig 7 83 OFF delay it is the time that must pass from the time of switch request to actual switch from high state to low state see Fig 7 83 Min ON time the minimum duration of a high state if the output switches to high state the low state will occur not faster than Minimum ON time see Fig 7 84 Min OFF time the minimum duration of a low state if the output switches to low state the high state will occur not faster than Minimum OFF time see Fig 7 84 Note If external output is active see the parameter Output active yes in the Chapter 7 15 3 2 Modbus MASTER Device channels parameter block for Mode disabled the device send to Slave device value 0 165 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 11 3 External outputs Control type as a linear output The parameters of External outputs in the type of control as a linear output are see Fig 7 93 e 166 Comm port this parameter is read only in External outputs menu it is the Modbus port number for which the Modbus external output is configured a description of Modbu
23. stop 2010 12 03 9 55 00 a m n step 3 press the Export selected files button and wait for a message to end the operations of exporting data to a flash drive Logging files Export selected files Delete selected files File selection Group 01 Select one or many options 2011 01 27 10 15 19 2011 01 27 10 16 16 Group 01 Press to select 2011 01 27 10 19 25 011 01 27 10 20 2011 01 27 10 20 25 Group 02 no items 2011 01 27 10 22 00 Fig 7 19 Steps of exporting logged files to flash drive After exporting logged files a folder is created on the flash drive with the same name as the product identification number which includes a folder with the selected logged files Deleting files from the device is similar export logging files the difference is that instead of pressing the Export selected files button in 3 step see Fig 7 19 press the Delete button 49 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Files management The second button on the File management menu is the Configuration files button Pressing this button will open the menu shown in Fig 7 20 which allows the user to load save the configuration and Modbus templates Configuration files Load configuration A Save configuration Load Modbus template Save Modbus template Load Modbus slave template Save Modbus slave template Fig 7 20 View window when the c
24. Low limit the value below which there is a low state at the output displayed as status Lo High limit the value above which there is a high state at the output displayed as status Minimum simulated value lowest generated signal level Maximum simulated value highest generated signal level Period duration in seconds of one cycle of the Demo signal selected in Mode parameter High state time this parameter is displayed only for the rectangle mode it defines for how long in seconds generated signal will be in Maximum simulated value state Rise time this parameter is displayed only for the triangle mode it defines how long in seconds generated signal will be rising from Minimum simulated value to Maximum simulated value User should remember that defined Demo input which was edited from any logical channel will change its settings in all channel where it occurs Example configuration of a Demo for sinus mode shown in Fig 7 76 Log channel lt Channel 14 3 Source configuration Source configuration Name Inp X3 Demo a Unit mA Name Inp X3 Demo Mode sinus Mode Hardware input Mode rectangu rectangular triangle Source Inp X3 Demo Unit mA Configure sou 225 Set the value by pressing the appropriate boxes next to the labels Fig 7 76 Example configuration of Demo 137 User Manual For CONTROLLER DAT
25. Output number inside slot Slot tag Type of output Name ou go Currenb Unit mA Fig 7 77 Description of Name parameter in Built in outputs menu Output Source Select option Name Out C1 SSR Log ch 2 Cooling Log ch 1 Heating Source Log ch 1 Heating Log ch 3 Airing Alarm state no change C Log ch 4 Valve position in Levels C Log ch 5 Flow unit index Log ch 6 Flowmeter numbe wat ESEA Fig 7 78 Data source settings for built in output for SSR output module List of build in output modules slot tag and type of module is in 1 Hardware configuration parameters block Device information menu see Fig 7 25 in Chapter 7 4 INN Name Out X1 Sound signal Name Out V1 Virtual relay Mode disabled Mode above level Source Log ch 6 Flow Alarm state no change Levels Fig 7 79 Main settings of disabled left and enabled right output State of physical outputs can be used as source for Logical Channels for details see Chapter 7 8 3 Logical Channels Hardware output monitor mode 150 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 10 2 Built in Output Relays Sound signal Virtual relays The parameters of Build in outputs for Relays Sound signal Virtual relays are Name each output already has a name given by the device and user cannot
26. User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 8 6 Logical Channels Math function mode disabled Hardware input Hardware output monitor Modbus Set point value Mode MENU Device configuration Logical channel 2 9 1 Controller Profile timer Profile timer cycle counter Data from other channel This mode allows the user to define the Math function for display on the screen processed this data in any other logical channels or it can be the data source for output to the control and settings of any object Log channel Name Channel A Unit nane Function 1 Processing C Fig 7 52 Input channels menu parameters specific for Math function mode MultiCon has a wide variety mathematical function which increases functionality and the range of the applications of the device Fig 7 52 presents parameters of Input channel into Math function mode This mode allows the user to display channel value process this data in any other logical channel or it can be the data source for an output to control and set any object The parameters of Logical channel in Math function mode are Name it gives the name to the logical channel Unit to create a unit use the Scaling parameter more information see Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Mode Math function in this parameter user selects source type of data for logical channel
27. e for 16 bit format from 0 to 15 e for 32 bit format from to 31 Data mask the device allows the user to use the masking of data on individual bits mask OxFFFF for 16 bit format is means that the entire value of register is visible while the 0x0 mask no mask means that the value is zero 7 15 3 4 Modbus MASTER Register blocks parameter block The device has the ability to read data from the SLAVE devices using multi register queries By default this feature is configured automatically but can be switched to manual mode Register blocks group has following fields Blocks config mode automatic the device automatically creates a blocks of registers to be read using the list defined in Device channels sub menu Then the Block list is informal only and cannot be edited manual user must create a list of registers blocks using Block list parameter Maximum block size occurs only for the Blocks config mode automatic This parameter allows user to limit number of data registers to be read at once It can be very useful when SLAVE devices has a limitation of max number of registers read in a single frame Block list occurs only for manual mode parameter description bellow in this chapter Avail Input blocks read only submenu allows to preview automatically or manually created input blocks Avail Output blocks read only submenu allows to preview automatically or manually created output blocks
28. quad 1 active Prog input changes counting direction quad 4 active Prog input changes counting direction e inhibit it allows to temporary stop pulses counting Filter sets filter on counter inputs which allows to getting rid of negative effects of signal bounces it has following parameters disable filter is inactive recommended only in situation when to counter input is connected electronic input of other device e 10 90 filter is active setting one of frequencies causes that input signals which duration corresponds to half of the selected frequency will be considered as a unwanted signal bounces and ignored Using this option is recommended when to counter input is connected contact output of the other device 7 9 5 11 Optoizolated hourmeters modules HM hourmeters modules developed for the MultiCon units They allows to measure period of time between START and STOP signals as well as sum of periods These modules are ideal solution to control working time of a machinery duration of phenomena or for maintenance purposes The HM2 and HM4 have 2 and 4 independent counters respectively Each counter is equipped with 2 inputs START STOP and programmable which can be set as asynchronous RESET HOLD or used as independent digital input see Appendix 8 11 HM2 HM4 OPTOIZOLATED HOURMETERs MODULES With the HM module a Time Format functionality of the device is related see Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Chan
29. According to the order these terminals can look different than shown in Fig 4 8 or be not present Terminals and connections of available modules are shown in Fig 4 9 Fig 4 21 in Section 4 3 1 Shown below is an example of a configuration of the installed modules base Slot A UI8 module 8 current input amp 8 voltage input Slot B RT4 module 4 RTD input Slot C R81 module 8 relay output 1A 250V Slot D ACM module additional serial USB and Ethernet interfaces 4 3 1 Available modules UIA UIS U16 116 4 current 8 current 16 voltage inputs 16 current inputs 4 voltage inputs 8 voltage inputs IN1 lt lt gt lt 2 q IN3 e e e INA X x x IN5 2 S e 7 9 E z o 8 x x x lt lt GND IN9 lt gt N o INT1 12 gt X x IN13 lt _ 4 2 5 cN o IN15 IN16 X X x lt lt Fig 4 9 Voltage and current input modules 17 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER UI12 U24 124 12 current 24 voltage inputs 24 current inputs 16 12 voltage inputs Fig 4 10 Voltage and current input modules contd E IN2 2 IN3 3 IN4 x lt lt lt 5 lt 2 e N7 N o o INS x lt t IN9 lt N10 2 INI gt N e IN12 x
30. Block list submenu ule This button appears only for manual configuration mode and allows the user to add a new block of registers to list of register blocks This button appears only for manual configuration mode and allows the user to remove the block of registers from the list of register blocks Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allow switching between register blocks Middle button allows direct selection of a specific register block To the Block list parameters are 212 Block type read Holding reg HOLDING register group for reading purpose read INPUT reg INPUT register group for reading purpose write HOLDING reg HOLDING register group for writing purpose Register size defines data size can be set to e 16 bit registers data is read preset as 16 bit registers this value can be also used for 32 bit registers reading preseting In a such case data is composed as two 16 bit registers and params First register amp Last register must select a minimum of 2 registers e g First register 3h Last register 4h The User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER important parameter is then also Ordering see the Chapter 7 15 3 3 Modbus MASTER Register settings e 32 bit registers for 32 bit registers reading preseting only data is read as one 32 bit register First register value indicating the number of the first register of the block Last register value
31. HOLDING holding registers of SLAVE device compatible with Modbus protocol e INPUT input registers of SLAVE device compatible with Modbus protocol Write mode read only parameter informs about possibility to read or write register Register number any value from 0 to 65535 Data format we can select one of these options e 16 bits signed integer value the most significant bit is the sign bit e 16 bits unsigned integer value without information about the sign e 32 bits signed integer value the most significant bit is the sign bit e _ 32 bits unsigned integer value without information about the sign e 32 bits float floating point IEEE 754 format e 16 bits BCD unsigned BCD value write two digits in each byte e _ 32 bits BCD unsigned BCD value write two digits in each byte 32 bit reading this parameter is only for 32 bit format user can select one of these options e two 16 bit registers 32 bit register Ordering this parameter is only for 32 bit formats the letters ABCD means A most significant byte of high words word 2 bytes B least significant byte of the high words C most significant byte of low words D least significant byte of the low words e ABCD standard e CDAB e DCBA e BADC 211 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Data shift values can be bit moved to the right any integer value in the range parameter does not exists for float format
32. Most important parameters of Ul modules contd UI12 Number of inputs 12xU 12xl Hardware limitations voltage inputs current inputs OV 12V OmA 24mA OmA 24mA Hardware resolution voltage inputs current inputs 1mV 1 voltage inputs current inputs 0 1 25 0 1 25 0 1 25 0 1 25 C Covered CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges type type type 0 5V 1 5V 0 10V 2 10V 0 20 4 20mA 0 5V 1 5V 0 10V 2 10V 0 20mA 4 20 Temperature limitations 50 ppm C 50 ppm C 50 ppm C Internal impedance voltage inputs current inputs 50kQ type 1000 type 1000 Protection voltage inputs current inputs no 50mA auto reset fuse no 50mA auto reset fuse Sampling period 10ms 10ms 10ms Isolation strength 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC Weight 62g 62 5g 63g Measurement ranges are limited by software upon hardware inputs ability check current list of CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges at producer s website Tab 8 3 Technical data for the module Ul12 U24 124 229 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER UI4 4 current 4 voltage inputs mA 4x 0 20 Sensor 1 Sensor 2 Power supply depending on version 4x 0 10V SERVICE
33. Source Y parameter select logical channel 2 for Displaying block parameters e Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 e Graph low parameter write 0 e Graph high parameter write 80 129 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example 7 8 11 8 Application of Logical channel in the Controller mode see Chapter 7 8 7 Logical Channels Controller mode Task The task is to configure Controller to control via RS 485 the Heater to get a constant object temperature The Controller uses logical channel in Set point value Mode temperature 85 C and the feedback signal comes from the sensor Pt100 Solution Before measuring and regulating the temperature user should configure the device as follows and then connect the thermocouple sensor and Current converter to the device An example of the connection is shown in Fig 7 72 r I Pt100 I sensor I Control system I Power supply i depending on version Heater Slave device i Slave address 1 Register 1h we DC 5 Imax 200mA I I 09A Current I GND converter Fig 7 72 Schematic diagram for the RT4 module and MB1 Modbus port The first step i
34. Thermocouple A3 3 4 24V DC 5 Imax 200mA Fig 7 63 Schematic diagram for the TC4 module In the first step you need to define five logical channels respectively for four temperatures in the hall of the symbols A1 A2 A3 A4 and an temperature alarm condition To do this a For the temperature reading of sensor 1 with the symbol A1 touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any logical channel such as 1 in Name parameter write Temperature A1 Mode parameter set as Hardware input Source parameter set as A1 Thermocouple see the connection in Fig 7 63 press the Source configuration button to set the source configuration options Mode parameter et as Thermocouple K in Low Limit parameter write 200 C e in High Limit parameter write 1370 C for Display block parameters e Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 117 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER e Graph low parameter write 200 C Graph high parameter write 1370 C For the temperature reading of sensor 2 with the symbol A2 Using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Logical channel except for 1 for example 2 in Name parameter write Temperature A2 Mode parameter set as hardware input Source para
35. generate profiles timers or also the mathematical combination of one or more logical channels All of these can be freely named and described by the user and presented in many forms as numerical values vertical and horizontal charts vertical and horizontal bars as needle graphs Every logical channel visualised or not can be used as input data for one or more controlling process The CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER implements many different controlling methods above defined level below defined level User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER inside defined range outside of defined range PID control Build in analog input Buid in binary input External input RS 485 Profiles timers Controller Mathematical amp logical combination data States of hardware amp virtual outputs Set point values Interface Numeric logical or text values Charts amp bars Reading data via Ethernet Reading data stored on the Display flash drive Interface Needles indicators Grouping data Interface Build in analog output Build in binary output External output RS 485 Fig 2 1 Basic structure of the multichannel device Process control with built in outputs can be done with programmable hysteresis and delays of the outputs control It is possible
36. gt EJE ac Power supply depending on version Fert MB l MASTER i pu device SLAVE lt gt device A a B 7 isolate Y Multicon is SLAVE device for this network Multicon is disabled for this network Y Multicon is SLAVE device for this network Multicon is MASTER device for this network Fig 47 Sample list of available Modbus ports 89 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER SLAVE Device mme Reg N ps Reg 0 Tt a Reg 0 Reg N Address 1 niin LAVE Unit Dos Address 2 Reg N Reg 0 us Built in Advanced Don Address 4 SLAVE Reg N Port MB2 lt q Device NE Modbus Device Address52 Port MB1 Master SLAVE Address 8 Device Reg 0 Port MB3 ENT eg Reg N m Y Reg N SLAVE Device configuration Device Address 82 Tm SL AVE Hardware Inputs Device Reg 0 Reg 0 Mogpus eg P SLAVE Device Address 1 Device input Register 0 Fig 7 48 An example of configuration block diagram of the Modbus protocol implemented in the device are not connected will returns an error and instead of the value will display the D Logical channel s in Modbus mode reading registers from Slave devices that state ERR For more information about the Modbus protocol implemented
37. in Pause source parameter and will be resumed when the device detects another change like that in this channel If Profile timer is paused and new trigger will be detected the Profile timer will react on this trigger like it would not be paused Pause source this parameter is not visible when Pause mode parameter is set as disabled It contains the list of Logical channels where selected one will be pause source for the Profile timer Idle value the value before and after generating the defined the Profile Section list submenu where user can define Profile timer consisting up to 100 sections For more details see below in this Chapter Looping each Profile has a possibility to repeat its generated signal This parameter has following options e disabled the Profile is generated only once e counted allows to generate Profile specified number of times defined in Loop count parameter e from logical channel this option allows the user to run a Profile a specified number of times set in the selected logical channel defined by the Looping source parameter e infinite this option allows the user to infinite repeating of generated Profile Loop count this parameter is visible only when Looping parameter is set on counted It allows the user to enter number of generated Profile repetitions Looping source this parameter is visible only when Looping parameter is set on from logical channel It allows the user to
38. 25mV 10 100mV 100mV Temperature stability 50 ppm C 50 ppm C 50 ppm C Input impedance typ 1 typ 1 typ 1MO Sampling period 385ms 385ms 385ms Weight 32g 42g 52g Measurement ranges are limited by software upon hardware inputs ability check current list of CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges at producer s website Hi and Lo terminals of all inputs are pulled up down by 470kW resistor to internal supply GND It is strongly recommended not to connect Lo or Hi terminals of different inputs together but to connect every sensor using individual wires Tab 8 7 Technical data for the module TC4 TC8 TC12 240 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER resolution full range full range accuracy limited range limited range accuracy C 4 200 1370 0 51 100 1370 0 27 1 50 1768 0 41 071768 0 34 4 210 1200 0 44 100 1200 0 23 200 400 0 31 100 400 0 20 200 1300 0 80 100 1300 I 0 42 50 1768 0 47 071768 0 31 200 1000 0 40 100 1000 0 25 200 800 0 44 100 800 0 28 250 1820 0 96 480 1820 0 45 m A C A Tab 8 8 Measurement accuracy for the module TC4 TC8 TC12 norm PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 GOST R 8
39. 4 current inputs in06 05 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 20mA flowmeters FT2 2 pulse inputs 2 current inputs in01 02 amp 03 amp n04 lt in05 n06 FT4 4 pulse inputs 4 current inputs Inp11 Inp12 COM1 Inp21 Inp22 COM2 77 913 n08 GND 2 x 0 20mA Fig 4 13 Flowmeter modules 4 x 0 20mA 21 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 22 TC4 4 thermocouple inputs Be me gt e Pa gt N Q IN_T TC8 8 thermocouple inputs Fig 4 14 TC input modules TC12 12 thermocouple inputs n01 IN1 n02 Top IN2 n05 IN3 106 109 IN5 10 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER RT6 a gt 4 inputs inputs noT m z n03 2 n04 n04 n05 n05 n06 n06 1 2 07 n08 n08 n09 n09 n10 lt e 2 n11 n12 n12 n13 n13 n16 n16 ND n20 n21 ND n24 Fig 4 15 RTD input modules 23 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 24 UN3 3 universal inputs IN1 IN2 IN_T IN3 UN5 5 universal inputs IN1 E IN2 IN T IN3 INA IN5 Fig 4 16 Universal input modules User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER D8 8 Digital inputs n01 n02 03 04 05 in06 in08 in09 n10 IN1 E IN2 IN3 INA COM 1 4 IN5 ING IN7 IN9 IN10 IN8 ul COM 5
40. Background 1 Rotation direction Channels Slot 1 Theme sotz Theme Slot 3 Theme Slot 4 Theme Slot 5 Theme Slot 6 Theme Logging options Mode 1 Triggering source Description Besa period Alternative mode 1 l Alternative source 4 1 Alternative period 1 Alternative unit 61 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Mode Baud rate Format Request retials Interval SLAVE settings Device templates Load device templ Save device templ Device channels Output list Avail output blocks Device type bdo EEUU 1 Device templates Load device templ Save device templ Device channels Input list Output list egister blocks A Blocks config mode Block list Avail input blocks Avail output blocks Write mode Register number Data format 32 bit reading Ordering Data shift Output active Channel value Control type Block type Register size First register Last register Value register Log ch Status register Dec point register
41. GND 4 24V DC 5 Imax 200mA 5 P digital input 0 15 24V DC UI4 4 current 4 voltage inputs mA 4 x 0 20 Power supply depending on version 4 x 0 10V Sensor 1 Sensor 2 SERVICE 3 4 24V DC 5 Imax 200mA digital input 0 15 24V DC Fig 8 5 Connections for 3 wire sensor current 230 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER UI4 4 current 4 voltage inputs mA 4 x 0 20 depending on version U 4 supply 4 x 0 10V Sensor 1 Sensor 2 Does D EG D 4 24V DC 5 Imax 200 digital input 0 15 24V DC Fig 8 6 Connections for 3 wire sensor voltage 231 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 3 UI4N8 Ul4D8 UI8N8 UI8D8 MIXED UIN UID MODULES UI4N8 8 resistance 01408 4 current and 4 voltage 4 current and 4 voltage inputs 8 digital inputs 4 0 20 4 0 100 4x0 100kO 4 x 0 10V 4 x 0 20mA z 4 x 0 10V n20 com 13 16 UI8N8 8 resistance UI8D8 8 current and voltage 8 current and voltage inputs 8 digital inputs 4 0 20 4x0 100kO
42. and go to Edit points menu mice 2 Processing Scaling Select one option C disabled Log channel linear Scaling disabled Filter type disabled Processing Scaling configuration offset Displaying Scaling user usecha Input unit Output unit Num of points 2 Edit points CJ W Format numeric Configure p Filter type disabled Point Input Output value 25 O N Add point Addpoint Edit points 5 Select one option Delete point C i 0 0m EJEA T lt Fig 7 35 Configuring the user characteristic For Point 1 set input and output value point 5 in Fig 7 35 5 Switch to Point 2 by using the arrow keys and there also set the value of input and output point 6 in Fig 7 35 6 To add or delete points the user should use the Add point button or Delete point button respectively 71 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 When the user wants to add a new point between the existing point e g between 5 and 6 select the edit Point 5 and then add a new point by press the Add point button 8 Atthe end we check all the points defined by clicking the middle button between the arrows in the upper right corner of the screen point 8 and 9 in Fig 7 35 Filter type The Filter type parameter has options disabled filtering of the input value is turned off smoothing this o
43. e Hardware input see Chapter 7 8 2 Hardware output monitor see Chapter 7 8 3 e Modbus see Chapter 7 8 4 Set point value see Chapter 7 8 5 e Math function see Chapter 7 8 6 e Controller see Chapter 7 8 7 e Profile timer see Chapter 7 8 8 e Profile timer cycle counter see Chapter 7 8 9 e Data from other channel see Chapter 7 8 10 Latch parameter block allows user to set the latch function which will hold the last value of a channel this block has the following parameters e Mode this parameter allows the user to choose how to trigger the latch function there are 2 options disabled the latch function is disabled from logic channel the latch function is activated depending of the value of channel selected in the Triggering source parameter e Triggering source this parameter is only visible if user sets Mode from logic channel using this parameter the user chooses a logical channel which is the triggering source of the latch function when the value of triggering channel is SO the latch is active for a value gt 0 latch is disabled During device restart the logical channels which have the latch function enabled have value 0 and on the LCD screen blinking dashes appear in place of the value Processing parameter block is used for scaling and filtering data for explanation see below Displaying parameter block for these parameters the user selects the f
44. n04 x n04 j o i gt gt gt OUT 2 OUT 2 9 3 OUTA 9 OUT6 n07 s Low 08 SE OUT 1 n08 9i OUT 1 8 OUT 3 08 9 f OUT 5 CO PASSIVE CO PASSIVE c N c lnc c O c PASSIVE c N ed c Fig 8 27 Passive current output module IO2 104 108 As the output is passive type it is required to power the current loop Note that polarisation of IO2 104 IO6 108 outputs does not matter 264 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Most important parameters of IO2 104 and IO8 modules Number of outputs Output type Passive current output Passive current output Passive current output Passive current output Nominal analogue range 4 20mA 4 20mA 4 20mA 4 20mA Hardware output limitation 3 25mA 3 25mA 3 25mA 3 25mA Output voltage dropout max 9V max 9V max 9V max 9V Overload protection Internal resettable fuse 50mA Internal resettable fuse 50mA Internal resettable fuse 50mA Internal resettable fuse 50mA Loop Supply Range 9 30V 9 30V 9 30V 9 30V Output current precision 0 1 25 C 50ppm C 0 1 25 C 50ppm C 0 1 25 C 50ppm C 0 1 25 C 50ppm C Resolution 12 b
45. name of directory with log files e g 90 2010 08 04 13 50 39 The name of a directory is created according the schema bellow gX YYYY MM DD hh mm 55 where e X group number e YYYY year of log start month of log start e DD day of log start e hh hour of log start minute of log start 55 second of log start 272 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER LOG START DATE date of log start LOG END DATE date of log end If there is a NULL in place of date it means that particular file is not closed logging is not finished 120 1 41 2010 08 31 11 48 08 2010 08 31 11 48 08 0292NULL 2100818 isg Text ID GROUP NO DIR LOG START DATE LOG END DATE Fig 8 32 main log bin logs file view example File main log bin event log reserved for future usage File main log bin dev settings reserved for future usage File main log bin cons dev info info about the device contains dev type type of the device serial no serial number of the device S version software version h version reserved db version reserved File log db group settings settings of registered group 1 number of a group displayed name 3 logging start date 4 logging end date 5 log description 6 basic logging period 7 alternative logging period 8 9 1 1 1 number of logged channels 1
46. protected against destruction with an electrical installation fuse Wiring must meet appropriate standards and local regulations and laws In order to secure against accidental short circuit the connection cables must be terminated with appropriate insulated cable tips 14 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Tighten the clamping screws The recommended tightening torque is 0 5 Nm Loose screws can cause fire or defective operation Over tightening can lead to damaging the connections inside the units and breaking the thread In the case of the unit being fitted with separable clamps they should be inserted into appropriate connectors in the unit even if they are not used for any connections Unused terminals marked as n c must not be used for connecting any connecting cables e g as bridges because this can cause damage to the equipment or electric shock If the unit is equipped with housing covers and sealing to protecting against water intrusion pay special attention to their correct tightening or clamping In the case of any doubt consider using additional preventive measures covers roofing seals etc Carelessly executed assembly can increase the risk of electric shock After the installation is completed do not touch the units connections when it is switched on because it carries the risk of electrical shock Due to possible significant interference in industrial installations appropr
47. see Fig 7 15 opens the files management menu which is used to exchange data with a flash drive Requirements for a flash drive Maximum current consumption is 100mA Some flash drives with large capacities are not supported by the device in this case can use an external USB hub with power supply The manufacturer recommends the use of flash drives of 2GB in size The flash disk must be formatted for Windows as FAT NOTE not FAT32 update files configurations files and Modbus templates must be located in the main folder the root of the drive A view of the File management menu is shown in Fig 7 16 There are three buttons called Logging files Configuration files and Permission files The Configuration files button is always available The Logging files button is available when the device has the data logging option activated more information about the licence key for data logging is located in Chapter 7 4 and the Permission files button is available when Access mode parameter in Access options menu is set as MultiLevel see Chapter 7 17 Files management Logging files Configuration files Permission files Fig 7 16 Files management menu Logging files The Logging files button see Fig 7 16 opens the logging files management menu see Fig 7 17 This button exists only when the user has has input a valid licence for logging data To export and or delete logged files follow these steps
48. settings Processing parameter block is used for scaling and filtering data discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Displaying parameter block for these parameters the user selects the format and range of the data displayed on the screen discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Before selecting or after selecting the Prodfile timer from the list inside the Logical channel the user must configure the selected Profile timer by pressing the Configure source button or enter into the Profiles timers menu User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Configure source button in Profile timer cycle counter menu There are two methods for configuring Profiles timers by the Profiles timers menu take the following steps MAIN gt Device configuration gt Profiles timers see Chapter 7 12 PROFILES TIMERS directly in the Logical channel in Profile timer mode by pressing the Configure source button The configuration of the profile timer in both cases is the same An overview of settings of the profile timer is presented in Chapter 7 12 PROFILES TIMERS 7 8 10 Logical Channels Data from other channel mode disabled Hardware input Hardware output monitor Modbus Set point value Math function Controller Profile timer Profile timer cycle counter Mode MENU wp Device configuration Logical channel ET Data from other channel This mode has 2 applica
49. which will change the counting direction counting direction will change when value in this channel will be greater than O 7 9 5 5 Pulse flowmeter modules FT modules are equipped in two or four pulse flowmeters and same number of current inputs see Appendix 8 5 FI2 F14 FT2 FT4 FLOWMETER MODULES Pulse flowmeters are used to liquids gases and bulk materials flow measurement based on pulses from sensor and calculating total flow in selected channel Each pulse channel is equipped in counting inputs Inp n 1 Inp n 2 and common ground COM n All pulse channels are galvanically separated from the device and from themselves The user can thanks to Scaling parameter in Logical channel see chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings interpret amount of pulses received by the device at its discretion which allows to cooperate with any kind of pulse sensors Current inputs are used to current measurement in typical ranges 0 20 mA 4 20 and to facilitate their connection they are grouped and they have common ground but it is isolated from the supply voltage and other modules Pulse flowmeter parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays the time base of the measurement Base unit defines unit which is used by the totalizer for example when flow measurement unit is
50. 0000F9E9 22 0000 11 0748 20 8248222 0000211 0748 320 8248T 0000FSEA gt 22 0000 13 4498 21 8317 22 0000 13 4498 21 83174 Fig 8 38 partX db samples file view example Organisation of files stored in a flash drive while copying Log files are stored on a disk according to following schema 1 if a directory with the name equal to device s serial number does not exist then it is created 2 in such directory files witch information about logs are created description bellow 3 each log is stored in a separate subdirectory Files hierarchy DISK Serial numben main log bin logs main log bin event log main log bin dev settings main log bin cons dev info log1 directory log2 directory log db chan conf log db group settings log db log files partO db raster part0 db samples partO db timestamp log db conf xml 277 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 17 DIRECT ACCESS TO LOG FILES USING HTTP PROTOCOL Request format To request specified data the user must perform CGI query on address specified below using described format http lt IP_address gt cgi bin data cgi cmd lt command gt amp id_first x amp id_last y amp additional parameters Almost all queries return data where the first column is an ID number In order to 1 reduce device load use parameters id first and id last These parameters limit the amount of data processed and sent to given ld range Example To limit the a
51. 0FFFFh Status for logical channel 1 Oh data valid 1h data not ready 20h software error 40h bottom border of the software measurement range is exceeded 80h top border of the software measurement range is exceeded 2000h hardware error 4000h bottom border of the hardware measurement range is exceeded 8000h top border of the hardware measurement range is exceeded FFFFh data not available e g logical channel not configured 203h Yes 0 6 Decimal point for logical channel 1 Register from 204h to 2F0h Measurement results status and decimal point for Logical Channels 2 60 Measurements results integer format 0 OFFFFh Measurement result for logical channel 1 high word not considering the decimal point 0 OFFFFh Measurement result for logical channel 1 low word 0 OFFFFh Status for logical channel 1 Oh data valid 1h data not ready 20h software error 40h bottom border of the software measurement range is exceeded 80h top border of the software measurement range is exceeded 2000h hardware error 4000h bottom border of the hardware measurement range is exceeded 8000h top border of the hardware measurement range is exceeded FFFFh data not available e g logical channel not configured 403h No 0 6 Decimal point for logical channel 1 Register from 404h to 4F0h Measurement results status and de
52. 1 and 8 Solution First configure the device in MASTER mode like in Example 7 15 4 1 then configure it as follows and connect the SLAVE device as shown in Fig 7 69 Slave device 1 Device name Temp converter Modbus settings Baud rate 9600 bit sek Slave address 1 Registers Register 1h Register 2h Register 3h Slave device 2 Device name Temp converter Modbus settings Baud rate 9600 bit sek Slave address 8 Registers Register 1h Register 2h Register 3h Power supply depending on version SERVISE 4 digital input EJ 0 15 24V DC isolated Master Device Port 1 Fig 7 69 Schematic diagram for SLAVE devices connected to MultiCon In first step you need to configure Logical channels which will read data from Slave devices To do this touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any logical channel such as 1 in Name parameter write Temperature 1 Mode parameter set as Modbus Port parameter set as MB1 MASTER SLAVE devices parameter set as Addr 1 Temp converter Device input parameter set as Inp 1 HR 1h b0 15 that reads Register 1h from SLAVE 1 device Scale parameter set as linear in this example we don t need scaling but it is the only way to set unit displayed on the
53. 1 Risetime 60 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Profiles times Controllers Groups Access options 5 Triggering mode 1 Triggering source 1 Triggering times g Pause mode L Pause source 4 Idle value Section list Looping Loop count Return to possition Controller name Mode Dead zone Months Days Week days Hours Minutes Seconds J Duration Unit Shape Final value Controller parameters P coefficient 1 coefficient 1 Decoefficient 1 Differentiated signal Controller output Offset Low output limit High output limit Controller output Init type Remote display IP address Screen number ltd gt Access mode 1 Access pasword zl Access timeout 4 Name Password Permissions L Access dongle Assign dongle Remove dongle Group Display option Name Bars Charts Line width Time scale
54. 109 Block diagram of the Controller implemented in the device Formula for Controller output 1 r P x FT x ssa D x y i differential component integral component 185 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 13 2 Examples of Controller configurations Example 7 13 2 1 Application of the Controllers Task The task is to configure the controller which will control via RS 485 the heater in order to obtain a constant object temperature A logical channels with set point value and temperature from PT100 sensor are connected to the controller After pre analize the sensor type and the transmittance of the object we set the controller coefficients on values P 0 3 0 5 D 0 02 We do not want that the controller respond for deviation lower than 2 C On controller s output set 0 20mA range because that is the range of the converter we use to control the heater in this task Solution First configure the controller then connect the Pt100 sensor and Current converter to the device Example of this connections are shown on Fig 7 110 I I Pt100 SlotB gt RT4 I Sensor 4 RTD inputs RTD Control system i i Power supply n05 1 depending version 06 RTD J I Heater Slave device i Slave address 1 RTD Register 1h n12 ene us Current
55. 13 2 2 Application of the Controllers cooperation with heater which is controlled by SSR output Task The task is to configure the controller which will control the heater using SSR output in order to obtain a constant object temperature A logical channels with set point value and temperature from thermocouple type K sensor are connected to the controller Due to fact that choosing of PID controller is not matter of the task we can use following demonstration values 5 10 D 1 We do not want that the controller respond for deviation lower than 2 C On controller s output set 4 20mA range because that is the range of the converter we use to control the heater in this task Solution First configure the controller then connect the type K thermocouple and Current converter to the device Example of this connections are shown on Fig 7 111 Slot A Slot C TC4 S8 4 thermocouple inputs 8 SSR outputs Type K thermocouple A Power supply depending on version Control system Heater SERVICE GND 24V DC 5 Imax 200mA DG 0 5 Current a GND converter 1 RS 485 A isolated K Fig 7 111 The connection scheme for RT4 module and Modbus MB1 port 187 User Manual For CONTROLL
56. 25 Relay output modules 262 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Most important parameters of R45 R81 R65 and R121 modules R45 R81 R65 R121 Number of relays 4 SPDP Switchable 8 SPST N O 6 SPDP Switchable 12 SPST N O Max load per relay cos j 1 resistive load 1A cos j 1 resistive load cos j 1 resistive load 1A cos j 1 resistive load Max voltage switched by relay 250V AC 250V AC 250V AC 250V AC Isolation strength between relays 1 min 630V AC 1 min 630V AC 1 min 630V AC 1 min 630V AC Insulation strength relay to CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER supply 1 min 1000V AC 1 min 1000V AC 1 min 1000V AC 1 min 1000V AC Weight 50g 74g 133g 110g Tab 8 22 Technical data for the module R45 R81 R65 and R121 Isolation Device Driver Fig 8 26 Internal structure of the Relay outputs module 263 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 14 102 104 106 IO8 PASSIVE CURRENT OUTPUT 102 2 current output 104 4 current output 106 6 current output 108 8 current output Pu NET m for E EE gt gt mo B OUT3 Ge OUT 5 Kape T n04
57. 255 100 1 1 Modbus input 6 F s 1 233 100 m 2 Visualization MP 6 UAE 255 100 optional Set point value 1 Value 1E6 1E6 G Profile timer 1 Math function Profile timer Function Controller Controller Fig 5 1 The overall connections structure of the Logical channel with the device O Fig 5 1 shows general structure of of connections between logical channels and device inputs outputs Each of Logical Channels can be configured to represent measurement data from built in physical input channels Output data and states of physical output channels output data and states of external modules connected to CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER via RS 485 interface states and data coming from outputs of controlling processes generated profile timer states of virtual input channels and timers mathematical combination of other Logical Channels 33 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER More information about Logical channels and samples of configuration Logical channels are presented in Chapter 7 8 LOGICAL CHANNELS To make visualization clearer Logical Channels can be gather into Groups 5 1 2 Groups A Group is a set of 1 6 Logical Channels The CONTROLLERIDATA RECORDER can show on the same screen only channels belonging to the same Group additio
58. 7 6 CONFIGURATION MENU STRUCTURE General settings Input channels Built in inputs Built in outputs External outputs Binary output Alarm state Levels Level mode Level Lower level d Upper level Hysteresis Timing ON delay OFF delay 1 Min ON time Min OFF time Analog outputs Unit Source Input levels Lower level Upper level Output levels Lower level Upper level Alarm level Basic Language Date and time Reg num display LCD screen Backlight Screen saver Mode Initial view Display mode Displayed group Automatic view change Change mode Display mode Displayed group Displaytime Add new view Delete this view Move to pos Comm port Device Upper level Hysteresis iming ON delay OFF delay Min ON time utput levels Lower level Upper level Alarm level 59 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER T becar consan Source analog input Unit pe Input unit Unit Scaling 7 linear Mode
59. Built in inputs Binary input Inp X2 Digital 24V built in Demo inputs marked as Inp X3 Demo Inp X4 Demo Inp X5 Demo more about them see Chapter 7 9 4 Built in inputs Demo input numbered X3 X4 X5 Depending on customer s needs input modules description of available input modules is provided in Appendix 8 APPENDICES and the producer s website can be installed in respective slots A B or C location of slot see Fig 4 8 7 9 1 Built in inputs General settings Available in the device in the basic configuration is 4 Built in inputs Digital input and 3 Demo inputs and input modules installed in the device depending on the customer s needs Configured inputs can be used to control any process or can be used by any logical channel Switch to Hardware input mode in order to visualize the result or use for further processing Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allow you to switch between built in inputs The middle button allows you to directly select a specific built in input from the list Common parameter for all Built in inputs is Name each inputs has its own unique name and it can not be changed description of this parameter see Fig 7 74 134 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Input number inside slot Slot tag Type of input Fig 7 74 Description of Name parameter in Built in inputs menu Other parameters of Built in inputs menu depend on the mo
60. Final value for first section Idle value Legend J N Section for Profile without looping 1 Section for Profile with looping gt Retur to position 1 slope 2 Section for Profile with looping gt Retur to position 2 const value Fig 7 100 Sample of Profile timer with description of parameters The Profiles timers parameters for triggering mode level gate edge once edge retrig are Name it gives the name to the Profile Triggering mode selects a way to generate Profile timer there are five modes of triggering e disabled e level gate this means that configured by user Profile is generated when source signal will have a value gt 0 otherwise if source value lt 0 defined Profile will not be generated See Fig 7 101 and example a in Fig 7 102 edge once this means that configured by user Profile will be triggered by the rising edge from values lt 0 to the value gt 0 of source signal After the rising edge the Profile will be generated in whole once regardless of further changes to the signal source see Fig 7 101 and example b in Fig 7 102 e edge re triggering this means that configured by user Profile will be triggered by the rising edge from values S 0 to the value gt 0 of source signal However in this mode unlike the edge once mode the defined Profile will be generated
61. Function this parameter allow user to select math function from the list for more information see below in this Chapter Latch parameter block allows user to set the latch function which will hold the last value of a channel discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings 94 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Processing parameter block is used for scaling and filtering of data discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Displaying parameter block for these parameters the user select the format and range of data displayed on the screen discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Function parameter in the Math function mode Basic math functions implemented into device are addition subtraction multiplication and division The unit allows the operation of logic functions trigonometric array operations determining the arithmetic mean finding maximum and minimum values and many other function that are discussed in the table below After pressing the button next to the Function label go to a math function menu This menu consists of the following parameters Note Not all parameters are available for each function Function available for all math functions by pressing the button next to the this label a list of available math functions appears from which the user can select the appropriate function of source X ava
62. KEYS Fig 7 113 Examples of Phasor Charts Group views Bars sets the bars type when group is displayed in this mode e horizontal horizontal direction of bars position e vertical vertical direction of bars position G04 Group 4 2017 38 22 G05 Group5 296 d Pressure UE aie ere Heating eee _ 3 440 584 56 4 24 3 16 19 C 60 100 35 50 20 ey 70 ER I3 RH 0 30 60 48 3 97 56 69 43 93 0 0 0 10 0 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Fig 7 114 Examples of Horizontal and Vertical Bars Group views Line width sets the width of the line e 1pixel the char line one pixel width e 2 pixels the char line two pixels width e 3 pixels the char line three pixels width 191 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 192 Time scale time window which displays chart which contains samples from last e 19sec 48 sec 95 sec 3min 6 min 12 min 30 min 60 min Each group displays samples in time window defined in Time scale parameter in Groups menu see Fig 7 115 When Time scale is set as 30 min or more the device has possibility to display all samples which were measured to present moment and can fit in this Scale regardless if the device was on or off see Fig 7 116 Samples which were not measured will be displayed as 0 when time when the device was off does not fits betwe
63. KEYS Fig 7 122 Single big needle example 197 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example 7 14 3 2 Three channels view one bigger two smaller Task The task is to visualize three logical channels which will present following values Pressure Temperature and Humidity Solution Let s assume that we have configured three logical channels Logical channel 1 named Pressure A Logical channel 2 named Temperature A Logical channel named Humidity example of logical channel configuration are shown in 7 8 11 Examples of Logical Channels configuration We need to define Group with this logical channels to display them in one window on the screen To do that enter Groups menu and turn on Group 4 if it is turned off in Name parameter write Group 4 for Channels parameter block e Slot 1 parameter set as Logical channel 1 named Pressure Slot 2 parameter set as Logical channel 2 named Temperature e Slot 3 parameter set as Logical channel 3 named Humidity 5104 6 set as disabled all other parameter should be on default settings Next we need to define Initial view To do this enter General settings menu for Initial view parameter block Display mode parameter set as needles e Displayed group parameter set as Group 4L Group 4 Finally leave this menu and press Save settings button Result of just made changes will be visible after first measurement is called Exam
64. Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Input Output Multicon Set point value di Control gt Controller system feedback Fig 55 The overall structure of control system implemented in the device Latch parameter block allows user to set the latch function which will hold the last value of a channel discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Processing parameter block is used for scaling and filtering data discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Displaying parameter block for these parameters the user select format and range of data displayed on the screen discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings User must configure the controller parameters in the Controllers menu before using this controller to control real object To read more about Controllers profiles see Chapter 7 13 CONTROLLERS 105 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 8 8 Logical Channels Profile timer mode disabled Hardware input Hardware output monitor Modbus Set point value Math function Controller Mode MENU Device configuration p Logical channel PN Profile timer cycle counter Data from other channel This mode allows the user to set up appropriate Profile timer defined in Profiles timers menu which may generate signal defined by the user to display on the screen processed in
65. Profile timer in logical channel 1 in edge once mode which source is logical channel 2 which is connected to current input of Ul4 module Profile consists of four segments 1 ramp from 0 to 10 during 5 seconds 2 const value 8 during 2 seconds 3 ramp from 8 to 4 during 3 seconds 4 const value 4 during 1 second Looping is disabled and idle value is O Solution First configure the device as described below then connect the module to the measuring system Example of this connection is shown in Fig 7 57 see also Appendix 8 2 Ul4 UI8 UI12 U16 U24 116 124 VOLTAGE and CURRENT MEASUREMENT MODULES 179 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Value O N O o 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Time s Fig 7 105 An example of the waveform In the first step you need to configure the Profile timer To do this touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Profiles timers menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Profile timer such as 1 in Name parameter write Profile 1 Triggering mode parameter set as edge once Triggering source parameter set as Logical channel 2 in Idle value parameter write 0 because we want at the beginning the Profile has O value on the output enter the Section list submenu to define the sections 180 press the green plus at the bottom left side of the screen to configure Section num 1 in Duration paramet
66. R121 RELAY MODULES Task This example shows how to read the value from output module R45 Solution Before connecting relay to the device user should configure the device and then connect them as it is shown in Fig 7 67 see Appendix 8 7 R45 R81 relay modules After setting the configuration of the physical inputs can configure the input channel to read the output value Upper lt gt GND actuator PAY 220V Supply GND Lower Power supply a ct u ato r depending on version 24V DC 5 Imax 200mA 4 digital input 0 15 24V DC n02 n04 05 06 nog to ni n2 isolated Fig 7 67 Schematic diagram for the R45 module 122 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER To read the output value from module touch screen and press the Menu button press Device configuration button enter the Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Logical channel such as 5 in Name parameter write Relay 1 Mode parameter set as Hardware output monitor Source parameter set as Out C1 Relay see the connection in Fig 7 67 for Displaying block parameters Format parameter set as binary e in Off state text write OFF with red font color and yellow background e On state text write HI with green font color and violet back
67. Screen number can bet set from 0 9 in the MultiCon allowing the PC to display up to 10 devices screens User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER If DHCP parameter is set as disabled the parameters IP address and 1 Subnet mask must be configured correctly depending the local network settings which will work with the device User should contact with network administrator in case of errors in communication The actual network settings are visible in the Device Information menu see Chapter 7 4 7 17 ACCESS OPTIONS General settings Logical channels Built in input Built in outputs External outputs Profiles timers Controllers Groups Modbus Network settings To prevent accidental or unauthorized change of the settings user can set single or MultiLevel Access protection Both of them can be activated in Access options menu Single level access protection requires to enter password see Fig 7 130 in order to login as the Admin and obtain access to all settings of the device MultiLevel Access protection requires the user to go through the Authentication procedure see Fig 7 131 in order to login and getting access to appropriate permission It is done by choosing user see Fig 7 132 and passing his password Password can be activated in two different ways depending on level access protection In the Access options menu by pressing button next to Access password label for single level mode or in Users
68. Source X Log ch 1 3 4 5 Latch Fig 7 53 Sample configuration of logical channel in Math function mode User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Math function Description Example X Y The sum of Source X and Source Y value 1 2 The sum of channel 1 and 2 X Y The subtraction of Source X and 1 2 The subtraction of Source Y value channel 1 and 2 XIY The ratio of Source X and Source Y 1 2 The ratio of the value channel 1 to channel 2 X Y The product of Source X and 1 2 The product of Source Y value channel 1 and channel 2 X gt 0 AND Y gt 0 Logical AND 1 AND 2 result 1 when the value of channel 1 and 2 is greater than 0 X gt 0 OR Y gt 0 Logical OR 1 OR 2 result 1 when the value of channel 1 or and 2 is greater than 0 X gt 0 XOR Y gt 0 Logical XOR 1 XOR 2 result 1 when the value of the one channel is greater than 0 and the value of second channel is lt 0 When both channels have values lt 0 or when both channels have values gt 0 then the result is 0 SUM X i The sum of selected channels SUM 1 2 3 4 the result is the sum of channels 1 2 3 4 MEAN The mean value of the selected channels MEAN 1 2 3 4 the result is the arithmetic mean value of channels 1 2 3 4 MULT X i The product of the value of the selected channels MULT
69. The result of the changes will be visible after a call to the first measurement and manual switch for displaying Group 1 and needles mode see Chapter 6 3 2 Navigation bar Example of a window view for 3 logical channels is shown in Fig 7 62 116 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example 7 8 11 2 Application of Logical channel in the Hardware input mode for TC4 modules see the Appendix 8 6 TC4 TC8 TC12 THERMOCOUPLE SENSOR MEASUREMENT MODULES and Math function mode Task The task is to measure the four temperatures in the production hall by using a thermocouple K type If all temperatures are greater than the preset value of 140 C in a separate channel alarm condition is to display the inscription Hl in other cases is displayed LO All logical channels and a channel with a temperature alarm condition will be displayed in one window in values mode Solution Before measuring temperature the thermocouple sensors should be connected to the device An example of how the connection is shown in Fig 7 63 see also Appendix 8 6 TC4 TC8 TC12 THERMOCOUPLE SENSOR MEASUREMENT MODULES 4 thermocouple input in01 TE Thermocouple nos A2 IN2 Thermocouple Power supply hol ns Thermocouple depending on version In06 gt p n07 7 197 4
70. Valve position index 12 54 1 1 706 3 3 0 1 Aun Af _3 Setpoint Flow unit index Setpoint Flow unit index 456 22 456 22 OO PA mo oo T IW _ 0 Valve power Flowmeter number Valve power Flowmeter number Fig 7 39 Input channels menu 2 different kinds of Displaying parameters 76 To calculate percentage which will be displayed on the indicator the device is using following equation noto 100 Hi Lo where result V value in logical channel Lo Graph low value in logical channel Hi Graph high value in logical channel User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Channel highlight block of parameters used to change background color and its mode in the logical channel User can set up to three different variants of highlights depending to event weight which should trigger highlight in this channel G08 Group 8 quei du 0 51 _ TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS 23 501 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW Fig 7 40 Example of logical channel highlights In Channel highlight user can set following parameters e Mode is used to change the way of highlight displaying There are three options disabled permanent blinking e Blink period it appears when Mode parameter is set on blinking It defines the blink period of the highlight e Trig hold time it is a minimal time during which the highlight variant
71. a settings of PID controller which runs in channel 3 There are few basic well known methods described in the literature to choose P and D parametets optimal for the controlled process If user is not familiar with these methods also some exemplary values can be used suitable for demonstration of PID work process controlling slow processes like heating 1liter of water using 1000 Watt heater Mode PID Dead zone 0 for Controller parameters block parameters P Coefficient 5 coefficient 10 D coefficient 1 Differentiated signal feedback measured for Controller output block parameters Offset 0 Low output limit O High output limit 100 for Initial conditions block parameters Init type No init internal state O 166 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER The logical channels used for this example should be set as follow for Logical channel 1 Name Temperature Mode Hardware input Source Inp A1 we assume that built in input is connected and set properly for TC type K Precision 0 Graph Lo 0 Graph Hi 300 all other parameters should be on default settings for Logical channel 2 Name Desired temp Mode Set point value Unit C Edit Button enabled Edit range low 120 Edit range high 200 Precision 0 Graph Lo 0 Graph Hi 300 all other parameters should be on default settings for Logical channel 3 Name PID controller Mode Controller Controlle
72. be 1 slightly different This situation can happened when decimal value can not be represented as floating point numbers or when the least significant digit is eight orders of magnitude smaller than most significant digit Example 7 15 4 1 Input configuration of Modbus protocol in MASTER mode Task The task is to configure a logical channel to read Slave registers eg temperature converter We read register 1 which contains temperature register 2 is a status register register 3 is a decimal point register The devices has addresses 1 and 8 To set Modbus configuration for the same devices Modbus template can be helpful which will be created in this task Solution First configure the device then connect the SLAVE device to the MultiCon in accordance with Fig 7 128 Slave device 1 Device name Temp converter Modbus settings Baud rate 9600 bit sek Slave address 1 Registers Register 1h Register 2h Power supply Master Register 3h depending on version Device Slave device 2 Device name Temp converter Modbus settings Baud rate 9600 bit sek digital input Slave address 8 lt 015 24 Registers Register 1h Register 2h Register 3h isolated Port 1 Fig 7 128 Connection diagram for the Modbus port MB1 Description of the register of SLAVE device shown in the Tab 7 9 214 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Register Range Register
73. built in Virtual relays marked as Out V1 Virtual relay Out V16 Virtual relay more about Virtual relays see Chapter 7 10 2 Built in Output Relays Sound signal Virtual relays Depending on customer s needs output modules description of available output modules is provided in Appendix 8 APPENDICES and the producer s website can be installed in respective slots A B or C location of slot see Fig 4 8 7 10 1 Built in outputs General settings Available in the device in the basic configuration is 17 Built in outputs Sound signal and 16 Virtual relays and output modules installed in the device depending on customer s needs Configured output can be used to control any process or can be used by any logical channel switched to Hardware output monitor mode in order to visualize the result or used for further processing the output data Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allow you to switch between built in outputs The middle button allows you to directly select a specific built in output from the list Parameters common for Built in outputs Name each output already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 77 Source this parameter contains a list of logical channels up to 60 where the selected logical channel will be a data source for this built in output see Fig 7 78 149 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER
74. change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 77 Mode this parameter allows the user to select the method of operation of the output Mode parameter has options see Fig 7 80 and Fig 7 81 e disabled the built in output is inactive e above level the result is a high state when the input data see Source parameter is above the level see Level parameter block otherwise the output is low state below level the result is a high state when the input data see Source parameter is below the level see Level parameter block otherwise the output is low state e inside range the result is a high state when the input data see Source parameter will be within the range see Level parameter block otherwise the output is low state e outside range the result is a high state when the input data see Source parameter will be out of the range see Level parameter block otherwise the output is low state e this option is visible only for SSR relay output type PWM mode is discussed in Chapter 7 10 3 Build in output PWM Pulse width modulation mode for SSR relay output Source this parameter contains a list of logical channels up to 60 where the selected logical channel will be a data source for this built in output see Fig 7 78 Alarm state this parameter allows to choose type of output reaction in case of alarm state appearance The Alarm state is when the value of Logical channel in whic
75. channel Reset source available for some math functions selects a logical channel which will be reset source for the function Reset triggering available for some math functions allows to select triggering method from the logical channel the user can set following options e high level function resets when resetting channel is in high state e low level function resets when resetting channel is in low state rising edge function resets when in resetting channel rising edge occurs e falling edge function resets when in resetting channel falling edge occurs J input mode available for Function flip flop the user can set following options e always 0 flip flop J input is always in logical state O e always 1 flip flop J input is always in logical state 1 e from log channel means that flip flop J input source will be logical state value of selected logical channel e from channel negation means that flip flop J input source will be negated logical state value of selected logical channel J input source available for Function flip flop selects a logical channel which will be source for flip flop J input K input mode available for Function flip flop the user can set following options e always 0 flip flop K input is always in logical state O e always 1 flip flop K input is always in logical state 1 e from log channel means that flip flop K input source will be logica
76. displayed Hi state 7 9 5 2 Mixed UIN UID modules Mixed UIN UID modules has sixteen or twenty two inputs which allows to measure current voltage resistance and temperature using NTC sensors and can be equipped with uninsulated digital inputs Full hardware configuration description is in Appendices 8 3 UI4N8 4408 UI8N8 41808 MIXED UIN UID MODULES To make sensor connection easier inputs are grouped and all ground terminals are common but separated from power supply and other modules When inputs are used it is recommended to use shielded wires and connect shield to GND connector on the module Voltage inputs parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays measurement unit V Mode defines measurement range Low limit defines measurement level bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state 138 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Current inputs parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays measurement unit mA Mode defines measurement range Low limit defines mea
77. e ON label e OFF label 271 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER channel HI level e channel LO level In firmware later than 2 14 2 e precision text data describing selected number precision e g 0 00 mean two decimal digits part data format description Specific log data There can be following types of data raster holds information about samples interval e Sample ID in hexadecimal notation called Rid raster value in seconds called Rv timestamp samples synchronization markers sample ID in hexadecimal notation called Tid sample time called Tt samples channels measurements data Channel order is the same as row order in log db log files sample ID in hexadecimal notation called Sid e floating point text representation of sample value for the first logged channel floating point text representation of sample value for the N th logged channel How to calculate the precise sample time To calculate time of sample number Sid use below procedure Find Rv and maximum Rid where Rid S Sid Find Tt and maximum Tid for Tid S Sid A Calculate sample time St using given equation St Tt Sid Tid Detailed description of files File main log bin logs contains 1 unique decimal number identifying log GROUP NO number of a logged group correspond to a device s group starting from 0 DIR
78. e Configure scaling function which allows to add a constant value to input value It is given by formula y x offset In this function there are following parameters e Input unit read only parameter it displays unit of the logical channel source e Value to add it defines offset value d user char is defined as set of X Y points Number of the points is variable and may be set from 2 to 20 points which make linear segments see Fig 7 34 After choosing this option parameter appears e Configure scaling submenu which allows to define further points of the user characteristic There are following parameters Input unit read only parameter it displays unit of the logical channel source A Output unit unit of rescaled data 69 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER of point read only parameter in displays number of points that currently are defined in characteristic Edit points submenu that defines point in characteristic Input value point value before scaling Output value point value after scaling Add point button adds new point behind currently displayed Delete point button deletes currently displayed point parameter is inactive when number of points in characteristic is 2 The arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allows to switch between points The middle button allow direct selection of a particular poin
79. example 80 for Screen saver block parameters e Mode parameter set as disabled as in this example we want to display all the time Backlight with the same clarity for Initial view block parameters Display mode parameter set as value e Displayed group parameter set as Group 1 Temp Measurment for the Automatic view change block parameters e Change mode parameter set to disabled as in this example we want to all the time displayed only Group 1 in the same needle mode after setting all parameters exit the General settings menu Finally you must exit the menu by pressing the Save changes button The result of the changes will be visible after a call to the first measurement and manual switch for displaying Group 1 Example of a window view for 5 logical channels is shown in Fig 7 64 02 Temperature Thermocouple AT 9 0 M 283 Thermocouple A2 1 65 Alarm state 150 Lo 5 48396 35 10 TOUCH THE 5 REEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Fig 7 64 The proposition of the result the Example 2 119 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example 7 8 11 3 Application of Logical channel in the Hardware input mode for RT4 modules see the Appendix 8 7 RT4 RT6 RTD MEASUREMENT MODULES Task The MultiCon with built in RT4 module can measure simultaneously temperature at four points Suppose you want to monitor the temperature in the office warehouse basement and corridor To monito
80. external output from logical channel list see Fig 7 94 INN gt Source Comm port MB1 MASTER Select one option Device Addr 1 SCK 10 Log ch 1 Heating Log ch 2 Cooling Output channel Out 1 HR 1h 1 b 0 31 E Log ch 3 Channel 3 Source Log ch 1 Heating Log ch 4 Channel 4 Input levels Log ch 5 Channel 5 Log ch 6 Channel 6 m a ld Fig 7 94 Sample selection of Source for External output 163 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 11 2 External outputs Control type as a rela For External outputs in as a relay Control type low state is 0 and high state is maximal value for 16 bit format is the value 65535 The parameters of External outputs in the Control type as a relay are see Fig 7 92 164 Comm port this parameter is read only in External outputs menu it is the Modbus port number for which the Modbus external output is configured a description of Modbus ports configuration and indication of the Modbus port connectors is located in Chapter 7 15 MODBUS Device this parameter is read only in External outputs menu it shows address and name of the SLAVE device configured in Modbus menu Chapter 7 15 3 Modbus MASTER mode Output channel this parameter is read only in External outputs menu it shows output channel number type of register and data format configured in Modbus menu each SLA
81. from Centigrades in which all of the MultiCon modules are scaled to degrees Fahrenheit The formula which should be used for this task is shown bellow T p 1 8 T 32 where Tr temperature in degrees Fahrenheit Tc temperature in Centigrades 9 5 slope 32 offset 66 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Lets assume that our temperature range is from 50 C to 85 C but this range is arbitrary In that case Scale parameter set as linear enter Configure scaling submenu e Output unit parameter write F in Input value parameter for Point 1 block write 50 which is low range limit e in Output value parameter for Point 1 block write 58 according to the formula e in Input value parameter for Point 2 block write 85 which is low range limit e in Output value parameter for Point 2 block write 185 according to the formula 1 a Processing Scaling disabled Scaling configuration Filter type disabled Input unit C disabled Displaying linear Log channel 9 j Output unit F Format numeric i C offset deeem Point 1 Input value 50 C Configure scaling Output value 58 F Filter type disabled Point 2 Displaying Input value 85 C Output value 185 F Fig 7 33 Example of scaling configuration c offset after choosing this option parameter appears
82. from the beginning every time when the Triggering source signal will generate an edge whether that Profile had been completed or not See Fig 7 101 and example c in Fig 7 102 175 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 176 Triggering source allows to choose triggering source of the Profile timer from the logical channel list Idle value the value which occurs at the idle state which means before and after generating the Profile timer Section list submenu in which the user can define up to 100 sections generated by the Profile timer For more information see Chapter 7 12 1 Profile timer General settings Looping each Profile timer has an ability to repeat its generated signal this parameter has options e disabled the profile is not repeated e counted allows to generate the profile specified number of times defined in Loop count parameter e from logical channel allows to run the profile number of times equals the value in the selected logical channel determined by the Looping source parameter e infinite allows to infinite repeating of generated Profile Loop count this parameter is visible only if Looping parameter is set as counted defines the number of repetitions of generated Profile Looping source this parameter is visible only if Looping parameter is set as from logical channel It allows to choose a logical channel from the list which value will be compared with the nu
83. green button on the bottom left side of the screen Section num parameter should be set as 3 in Duration parameter write 3 Unit parameter set as second Shape parameter set as slope Final value parameter write 4 press green button on the bottom left side of the screen Section num parameter should be set as 4 in Duration parameter write 1 Unit parameter set as second Shape parameter set as const value Final value parameter write 4 e Looping parameter set as disabled for Displaying block parameters Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 0 e in Graph low write 0 e in Graph high write 10 Configuration of logical channel 2 Triggering source in Hardware input mode for current input is shown in Example 7 8 11 1 for this mode we configure logical channel 2 in this task Second method is shown in Example 7 12 4 1 133 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 9 BUILT IN INPUTS General settings Logical channels MENU Device configuration m Built in inputs Built in outputs External outputs Profiles timers Controllers Groups Modbus Network settings Access options The Built in inputs menu is directly related to the available inputs installed in the device The basic version includes inputs built in Digital input is always marked as Inp X2 Digital 24V more about it see Chapter 7 9 3
84. gt lt board lt gt Fig 8 16 Internal structure of the optoisolated Digital inputs module 252 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 10 CP2 CP4 OPTOISOLATED UNIVERSAL COUNTERS MODULES CP2 2 universal counters Inp11 Inp12 Prg1 Counter 1 Res1 05 lt com _ 06 lt Inp21 lt Inp22 108 lt Prg2 gt Counter 2 Res2 COM2 4 4 universal counters n01 lt Inp11 gt Counter 1 gt Counter 2 Res2 COM2 Inp31 Inp32 gt Counter 3 gt Counter 4 Fig 8 17 Optoisolated counter modules CP2 and CP4 are modules of universal 4 input counters Fig 8 32 Each counter has common terminal COM and is optically isolated from other counters and CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER GND signal as well see Fig 8 18 Most important parameters of CP2 and CP4 modules CP2 CP4 Number of inputs 2 groups of counter inputs 2 groups 4 inputs every group optoisolated from the other signals 4 groups of counter inputs 4 groups 4 inputs every group optoisolated from the other signals Terminal description Inp n 1 Inp n 2 counting inputs pulse Prg n programmable inputs Res n reset inputs CONM n common inputs Inp n 1 Inp n 2 counting inputs pulse Prg n programmable inputs Res n reset inputs COM n common inputs n 1 2 n 1 2 3 4 Input
85. indicating the number of the last register of the block for single block with one 16 bit register the parameter First register and Last register must be the same number register Manual mode configuration of registers blocks introduces a freedom when setting Block list parameters Take care to set Block list parameters according to Input list and Output list in Device channels parameter block of the device see above in this Chapter If user creates a block of registers to read preset in which there were not registers appearing on the Input list and Output list in the Device channels parameter this device in the case of read the read whole register block and registers undefined in Input list menu will not be visible in the Logical channel in Modbus mode which cannot be read either a data from this registers and to use this registers to control and regulating process preset will send the frame to preset the entire block of registers and registers which not defined in the Output list will not appear on the External output menu Warning in this case to Slave devices will be sent to a random value of these registers uncontrolled by the user 213 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 15 4 Modbus Example of Modbus protocol confiquration in the device Modbus protocol sends data in floating point format In this connection user should keep in mind that transmitted and received values using Modbus protocol can
86. input 2 4x pulse input 2 4x current input 4 6x RTD input module 4 8 12x TC input module 8 16 24 Digital input 3 5xuniversal input A 2 Ax universal counter input 2 4 hourmeter input Output modules are 8 16 24 SSR driver module 8 12x Relay 1A 250V module 4 6x Relay 5A 250V module A 2 A 6 8x IO passive current output Communication module ACM USB 23 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 6 WORKING WITH THE CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 6 1 CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER POWER UP After powering up a starting Logo is showed on the CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER display While the operating system is being loaded a progress bar is visible in the middle of the screen During this process the view of screen may stay dimmed for 3 5 seconds Please wait until the end of this operation before starting to operate the device Additionally in the last phase of loading in the lower left corner displays the software version After that the main application is started The view of the main program depends of the General settings see the Chapter 7 7 GENERAL SETTINGS and Group settings see Chapter 7 14 GROUPS An example view of the main program shown in Fig 6 2 6 2 THE USE OF THE TOUCH SCREEN Do not use pointers with sharp edges like tips of pencils and pens knifes scissors needles wires nails screws bolts etc while working with touch screen I
87. input channels Output active parameter set as yes Control type parameter set as as a linear output in Output register submenu in Register number parameter write 1h Data format parameter set as 32 bits float this depends on register format in Slave device 32 bit reading parameter set as two 16 bit registers A Ordering parameter set as CDAB because first the younger word part is send Register 1h then the older part Register 2h press the sign and then Output active parameter set as yes Control type parameter set as as a relay in Output register submenu in Register number parameter write 4h Data format parameter set as 16 bits unsigned this depends on register format in Slave device Data mask parameter write 0x0001 in Data shift parameter write 0 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER press the sign and then Output active parameter set as yes Control type parameter set as as a relay in Output register submenu in Register number parameter write 8h Data format parameter set as 16 bits unsigned this depends on register format in Slave device in Data mask parameter write 0x0001 Data shift parameter write 0 Blocks config mode parameter set as manual in Block list submenu Block type parameters set as write HOLDING reg Register size parameter set as 16 bit registers according to registers for
88. list menu for MultiLevel Access mode by typing user s password in text box see Fig 7 1 Fig 7 2 Fig 7 3 After closing the text box in place of entered password 8 asterisks will be displayed independently to password length Removing the password is even easier it is done by leaving the text box empty After that field next to Access password label will also be empty When the user passes through login process successfully on the information bar opened padlock with the letter A if single level mode is set or the user is logged as Administrator in MultiLevel Access mode appears see Fig 7 134a Otherwise a number of user will be displayed from 2 to 16 instead of opened padlock see Fig 7 134b Only the administrator can freely configure the unit without restrictions Furthermore the administrator configures other users accounts for MultiLevel Access Those users can configure the device according to Administrator s restrictions Entering incorrect password or attempt to enter to restricted function will cause denial see Fig 7 135 221 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER At a time only one user can be logged in The user can be logged out manually by touching the padlock icon on the information bar and confirming logout see Fig 7 136 or automatically after one minute for single level mode or after time set by the Administrator in both cases the time is measured from the last user s interaction with the devi
89. logical channel has Error state or value exceeds the range of a logical channel Hi Lo then output has the same state The following steps are 1 Select Math function mode in the appropriate logical channel e g 14 Press the button next to the Function label to enter the Function menu 2 Enter the Function sub menu by pressing the button next to the Function label 3 Choose function from the list in this case Sum XTi 4 Press button next to the Source X label to enter to the channel list 5 Choose logical channel from a list in this case 1 3 4 5 6 Set the X error handling parameter to errors forwarded to result 7 After configuring we get a description of function next to the Function label Sum 1 3 4 5 97 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 98 Log channel 5 u Name Channel 14 1 1 Function Select one option Unit none Function X Y Mode Math function Source X Log ch 1 Function 1 1 Type of source Y channel Source X ect one or many options IV og ch 1 Channel 1 2 Log ch 2 Channel 2 og ch 3 Channel 3 dv 0g ch 4 Channel 4 dv og ch 5 Channel 5 X error handling errors forwarded to resul Log ch 6 Channel 6 sum 1 3 4 5 Function Sum X i Name Channel 14 A Unit none Mode Math function Function Sum 1 3 4 5
90. logical channel named Calc First level Alarm state parameter set as no highlight go to Color parameter and set font color at the top of screen and background color at the bottom of the screen All other parameters should be set as default User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 8 2 Logical channels Hardware input mode disabled Mode menu w Device configuration Logical channel E Hardware input Hardware output monitor Modbus Set point value Math function Controller Profile timer Profile timer cycle counter Data from other channel This mode allows the user to measure data from installed input modules which can be displayed and or processed in any other logical channels e g by mathematical function or virtual relay or it can be the data source for controlling outputs The Logical channels parameters in Hardware input mode are Name it gives the name to the logical channel Unit for Built in modules it will automatically use the default Unit to change the unit use the Scaling parameter in Processing parameter block Mode Hardware input in this parameter user can select the source type of the data for the logical channel Source in this parameter user selects the source of the data from the hardware input list for the logical channel see below in this Chapter Configure source button after pressing this button user can change the source configuration e g th
91. m s the base unit is m Mode defines the time base which is used during the measurement pulses per second pulser per minute pulser per hour Low limit value which determines amount of pulses bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state but the actual flow value still will be used in balance calculation High limit value which determines amount of pulses above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state but the actual flow value still will be used in balance calculation Counting mode defines how the device should interpret signals on pulse inputs it has following options e with direction input Inp n 1 is input which counts pulses and Inp n 2 sets the counting direction low state positive flow counting up high state negative flow counting down quad 1 Inp n 1 and Inp n 2 work as a quad inputs quad 4 Inp n 1 and Inp n 2 work as a quad inputs with increased resolution 141 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Filter defines maximal frequency with 50 duty cycle the device will measure e disable the device is measuring without the frequency limitation however above 50kHz there can occurs errors in measurements and totalizer calculation e 10Hz e 25 Hz e 50 Hz e 100 Hz e 1 kHz e 5 kHz e 10 kHz e 50 kHz Zero time maximal awaiting time for the next pulse If this time is exceeded the device will display 0
92. menu and press the icon on the bottom left side of the screen enter the Hours menu and press the icon on the bottom left side of the screen enter the Minutes menu and press the icon on the bottom left side of the screen enter the Seconds menu and press the icon on the bottom left side of the screen enter the Section list submenu press the green plus at the bottom left side of the screen to configure Section num 1 o in Duration parameter write 0 2 sec o Unit parameters set as second Shape parameter set as const value Final value parameter write 1 press the green plus at the bottom left side of the screen to configure Section num 2 o in Duration parameter write 1 8 sec o Unit parameters set as second Shape parameter set as const value o in Final value parameter write 0 Looping parameter set as infinite Return to position parameter set as 1 Const val 1 0 2 sec leave the Profiles timers menu and enter the Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select the Logical channel 3 in Name parameter write Waveform generator Mode parameter set as Profile timer Source parameter set as P T1 Waveform generator for Displaying block parameters in Graph low parameter write 1 in Graph high parameter write 2 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 13 CONTROLLERS General settings Logical channels Built in inputs Built in outputs External outputs
93. on the modules installed in the device 7 9 3 Built in inputs Binary input Inp X2 Digital 24V The device has a built in digital input which can be used for example as a switch for a process Specifications of digital input are included in Chapter 3 TECHNICAL DATA This digital input has levels input voltage V digital input min max low level 0 1 prohibited level gt 1 lt 8 high level 8 24 Tab 7 5 Voltage levels for Binary input Inp X2 Digital 24V The Binary input has 2 parameters 136 Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Filter time in which user can change the filter time from 0 to 1000 seconds Filtering is disabled 0 sec by default This parameter determines how quickly the input can change as noticed by the device Input changes which happen quicker than value in Filter time parameter will be ignored Filtration can be used if e contact bounce occurs when switching e user deliberately want to reduce the maximum frequency of the input 7 9 4 Built in inputs Demo input numbered X4 X5 The device has 3 built in simulation Demo inputs which can be defined by the user The configuration contains parameters Mode defines shape of generated signal rectangle triangle sine Unit any user defined unit
94. outputs Relays Sound signal and Virtual relays the low state is value 0 and the high state is value 1 second because of their inertia If user will do it anyway the relay might not to D The manufacturer discourages forcing relays state changes often than every react on signal changes Levels parameter block see Fig 7 80 Fig 7 81 and Fig 7 82 This pane depends on the Mode parameter The parameters are Level mode has 2 options value means that the level will be defined as a constant value channel means that the level will be defined as a logical channel Level this parameter defines constant signal level exceeding which will cause output state change for Level mode value or allows to choose logical channel which actual value will be the threshold for output state changes for Level mode channel occurs for Mode above level if Source value is higher than Level value high state on output appears e bellow level if Source value is lower than Level value high state on output appears Lower level and Upper level these parameters define the range at which output state changes occurs for Level mode value or they allows to choose a logical channels which actual values will be range for output state changes for Level mode channel occurs for Mode e inside range if the input data is within the defined range at the output high state appears e outside range if the inpu
95. products 5 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 5 1 UNDERSTANDING CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER The CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER device was developed as a universal multichannel controller To maintain this concept its firmware was written with multi level structure The device runs under the control of a LINUX operating system keeping all subsystems ready to use and allowing independent and simultaneous operation of many processes communication data acquisition post processing visualisation etc Such an approach gives great advantages to high level applications making it flexible and dynamically configurable Similarly data structures and streams were implemented in quite a different way than in most similar devices The main difference is the concept of using Logical Channels as a bridge physical inputs and outputs visualisation and controlling processes Designers of CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER decided to use such solution to increase functionality of the device and make software near fully independent on the hardware 31 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 5 1 1 Logical channels A Logical Channel is a data stream existing in the memory of the device having it s own name and can be displayed in almost any way Logical Channels can be used as measurement inputs data source of control loop control source of the physical outputs input data to other Logical Channels data source for visualisation and loggi
96. query viewing settings of channel 2 to 11 http 192 168 1 176 cgi bin data cgi cmd current amp id_first 1 amp id_last 10 Obtaining settings cmdzsettings Current channels settings can be obtained by using value settings of cmd parameter This feature should not be used as a replace of recording data functionality because it causes high device load Use this feature to sporadic device settings check Example of query viewing all channels settings http 192 168 1 176 cgi bin data cgi cmd settings If valid data query is performed and no data can be returned example requesting list of logs but there was no logs on device or given boundaries are outside available ID range the blank page will be returned 1 If valid data query is performed but data requested not exists the device example requesting data of non existent log the error page 404 Not found will be returned If invalid query is performed the error page 400 Bad request with inappropriate error message will be returned Obtaining general device logging information cmdzmain log To obtain current device logging information a main log parameter can be used There must be specified additional parameter called file Values must be one of following 1 logs returns list of past and current logs 2 cons dev info returns device information similar to the cmd info parameter 3 dev settings returns other recorded device information currently returns b
97. read HOLDING reg in this block registers are 1 read type When this block is set as write HOLDING reg in this block register are read and write type 7 15 2 3 Modbus SLAVE The Modbus protocol handlin Parameters for Modbus RTU implemented in MultiCon Transmission parameters 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 2 stop bit no even odd parity control Baud rate selectable from 1200 to 115200 bits second Transmission protocol MODBUS RTU compatible 7 15 2 4 Modbus SLAVE List of registers The device parameters and measurement result are available via RS 485 interface as HOLDING and INPUT type registers of Modbus RTU protocol and via Ethernet interface as HOLDING and INPUT type registers of MODBUS TPC IP The registers or groups of the registers can be read by 03h function and written by O6h single registers or 10h group of the registers accordingly to Modbus RTU and TCP IP specification Register Range Register description 20h 0 199 Address of device Device identification code 21h 2050h 2060h 2050h device in big housing 5 7 display 2060h device in small housing 3 5 display Measurements results floating point format 200h Yes 0 OFFFFh Measurement result for logical channel 1 high word 204 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Register Range Register description 201h 0 OFFFFh Measurement result for logical channel 1 low word 0
98. sec 0 800 sec 0 800 sec Hi state minimum time limit 0 800 sec 0 800 sec 0 800 sec Isolation strength 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC Weight 32g 42g 69g Minimum external supply voltage is 10V if external supply is less than 10V then outputs are powered internally 259 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER PWM internal frequency and PWM period limit Pulse duty factor real resolution For example if PWM period is 0 1 sec then real resolution of Pulse duty factor is about 9 bits 0 1 5kHz 500 levels If PWM period is longer than 6 55 seconds then Pulse duty factor resolution is full 15 bits 6 56 5kHz gt 32768 levels PWM output quantization 20us Tab 8 21 Technical data for the module S8 S16 10V lt o Vcc F F 100mA 500mA Ow O Main board OUT 1 8 OUT 1 8 Driver pe Interface x gt EE gt lt lt GND Fig 8 22 Internal structure of the SSR output module 8 outputs 10V gt aed d F F 100mA 500mA O e OUT 1 8 Driver OUT 1 8 e O Main board o GND Interface IN a
99. select the logical channel from the list which value will be compared to the number of Profile cycle If the cycle value is equal or greater than value in the logical channel next repetition of the Profile will not start Return to position this parameter is invisible only when Looping parameter is set as disabled It allows user to select a section from the list from which any next generated Profile should starts In case when Section list in empty this parameter is also empty 173 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Section list Sub menu It allows the user to configure Profile timer consisted up to 100 sections and for each of them user can set Duration Unit Shape and Final value 3 This button allows the addition of a new section to list This button allows the removal of the section from the list Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allow switching between sections Middle button allows direct selection of a specific section The Section list parameters are duration selected Profile timer Profile timer Triggering mode level gate Triggering source Log ch 1 Channel 1 Idle value 30 Section list Looping disabled Section list Select one option 1 Slope to 12 25 0 sec C 2 Const val 24 180 0 sec C 3 Slope to 40 3600 0 sec 4 Const val 40 1920 0 sec Cy gt Slope to 20 1200 0 sec Duration Final
100. signals voltage levels logical LOW state Uin lt 1V Uin 1V logical HIGH state Uin 2 10V Uin 2 10V Max input voltage 30V 30V 253 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Max input frequency 5kHz 5kHz for quad signals Max input frequency 10kHz 10kHz for other signals Counter capacity 4 503 599 627 370 495 pulses 4 503 599 627 370 495 pulses 52 data bits 52 data bits Input current about 14mA 24V about 14mA 24V consumption about 6mA 10V about 6mA 10 Insulation strength 2kV 2kV between individual measurements inputs Protection 50mA auto reset fuse 50mA auto reset fuse Isolation strength 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC between internal circuits and measurements inputs Weight For signals with frequency greater than 3kHz it is recommended to keep duty cycle around 5096 and phase shift 90 Shift between input signals edges has to be at least 100us Tab 8 19 Technical data for the CP2 and CP4 modules 254 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER F 50mA R 1 4k Isolation Inp11 F 50mA R 1 4k Inp12 F 50mA R 1 4k Prg1 F 50mA R 1 4k Res1 o COM 1 Inp21 31 41o
101. tell when will third alarm appear g Channel where the temperature is measured and the alarms will appear Logical channel 1 First level n Name parameter write First level Mode parameter set as Set point value A Edit button parameter set as enabled In Unit parameter write C Precision parameter set as 0 0 n Graph low parameter write 50 In Graph high parameter write 85 All other parameters should be set as default Logical channel 2 Second level n Name parameter write Second level Mode parameter set as Set point value Edit button parameter set as enabled n Unit parameter write C Precision parameter set as 0 0 n Graph low parameter write 50 n Graph high parameter write 85 All other parameters should be set as default Logical channel 3 Third level n Name parameter write Third level Mode parameter set as Set point value Edit button parameter set as enabled n Unit parameter write C Precision parameter set as 0 0 n Graph low parameter write 50 n Graph high parameter write 85 A All other parameters should be set as default Logical channel 4 Calculating the time of the first alarm n Name parameter write Calc First level Mode parameter set as Math function Click on the Function button Function parameter set as X Y 80 Use
102. templates between different MulitCon devices using File management menu An example of Modbus template selection window is shown in Fig 7 126 Below this figure additional icons are described 201 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Bl TRS O1a TRS O2a TRS 11a Fig 7 126 Template selection window This button invokes software keyboard window allowing write or search the template name X This button allows the user to delete selected template 3 Navigation keys allows the user to select appropriate template 7 15 2 2 Modbus SLAVE Device channels for SLAVE mode Device channels parameter block has 2 buttons Output list submenu where the user can configure registers of available logical channels In this submenu the user decide which registers are read only or read and write Avail output blocks submenu where the user can review the block of registers configured automatically by the device This submenu is only for review In the submenu of the Device channels parameter block the visible buttons are Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allow the user to switch between channels blocks of input output registers The middle button moves directly to specific channel block of Input Output registers from the list 202 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Output list submenu This menu consists of following fields Value register su
103. the Ethernet connection Remote display settings allow the user to configure the MultiCon and to display any data with an external PC Parameters of the Network settings menu are 220 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows a device to be configured automatically eliminating the need for intervention by a network administrator e disabled DHCP is disabled the user needs to manual enter an IP address and Subnet mask in the following fields and a Default gateway address if required e enabled the network settings are automatically generated by the DHCP server after setting the DHCP it takes several seconds before the IP address is obtained from the DHCP server if user set this option other parameters in this menu is invisible IP address this parameter is visible only if DHCP parameter is set as disabled the user may enter a static IP address Subnet mask this parameter is visible only if DHCP parameter is set as disabled sets a range of IP addresses that can be accessed Default gateway this parameter is visible only if DHCP parameter is set as disabled and allows the user to enter a gateway IP address for use when the device is to communicate outside the local network Remote display parameter block this parameters let the user configure the MultiCon with an external PC to display the screen of MultiCon on the PC monitor parameters of this block are e IP address IP address of external
104. the device or remove the flash drive from the USB port during the update the update process must go continuously to the end the user will be informed of the progress throughout the update cycle Attention The user can not start an unfinished update again because this may damage the device there can not be more than one update file on a flash drive update files must reside in the main folder root of the drive the update process may take about 5 minutes depend on the version of the device The requirements for removable flash drives are presented in Chapter 7 3 FILES MANAGEMENT The Remote display button allows the MultiCon to communicate with the PC to display the screen of the MultiCon on the PC monitor to configure and view the data 1 This button is available only for devices with installed ACM ETU module Below please find a step by step description of how to configure the MultiCon with a PC 1 Download free Xming software from http sourceforge net projects xming files Xming 6 9 0 31 Xming 6 9 0 31 setup exe download 2 Install ming on your PC using default settings During installation enable create a desktop icon for Xming option and disable Launch Xming option 3 After installation of Xming use the right mouse button to open the properties window for desktop icons of the Xming and replace the multiwindow with ac screen 0 320 240 100 200 then close the window prop
105. the display The precision of the displayed data can be set in the device with any accuracy up to 4 decimal places it must be remembered that the resolution and accuracy of external sensors connected to the device is finite and usually not better than 0 1 User should pay attention on the highlight hierarchy If there are two or three variants of highlight generated at once one with the lowest number will be displayed The time scale is common for the entire Group and can be set in the Groups menu see Chapter 7 14 GROUPS Examples of Channel highlight configuration Example 1 Task User s task is to set blinking highlight on alarm channel which will be active when measured current value is too high or too low Solution After connecting all measuring devices and configuring them in MultiCon we can start to configure the highlights To complete the task we will need to configure 4 logical channels and 1 virtual relay a Channel with measured current value b Channel with overhead alarm threshold c Channel with bottom alarm threshold d Channel with highlight alarm e Virtual relay which will define when is time to activate the alarm Logical channel 1 Measuring the current n Name parameter write Current value Mode parameter set as Hardware input Source parameter set as Inp A1 Current Precision parameter set as 0 00 n Graph low parameter write 0 In Graph high param
106. time Format will always considers its value as a number of seconds and base on this and settings in Time pattern parameter the logical channel will calculate the value to display Time pattern this parameter occurs only when Format parameter is set as time it allows user to define time pattern at his will Only restrictions are that higher units have to be before lower units and different units have to be separated by colon character Allowed is to create units which contains any number of digits When user creates a pattern which is forbidden the device will detect it and set the pattern as default Precision this parameter occurs when Format parameter is set as numeric or time which specifies the precision to be displayed on the output value see Fig 7 39 Off state text this parameter occurs when Format parameter is set as binary when the input value is S 0 the value is replaced by the text defined by the user default settings text is OFF On state text this parameter occurs when Format parameter is set as binary when the input value is gt 0 the value is replaced by the text defined by the user default settings text is ON The text of Off state and On state can be e text with black font such as ALARM off OK text using numbers and special characters such as ALARM 12 e text using font color and or a background color for example OFF ON e no text only a rectangle with the selected color the wid
107. to 6 name of a file containing a detailed logging configuration logical channel number used for basic logging triggering or 1 if not selected 2 logging mode 1 always on 2 triggered 0 1 2 logical channel number used for alternative logging triggering or 1 if not selected 273 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 2 3 5 89 10 11 12 4 omo w UN ur File File Fig 8 33 log db group settings file view example log db conf xml file describing settings of the device log db chan conf file describing settings of logged channels This file contains as many rows as channels in logged group 1 logical channel number starting from O 2 channel name 3 channel source mode 4 displayed unit 5 display mode 0 numbers 1 binary 2 time 6 text for binary mode High T text for binary mode Low 8 Hi graph limit 9 Lo graph limit TeChannel 8 1 m gt 0s0N gt OFE 25 000000 0 000000q SsChannel 9s1 m gt 25 000000 0 0000004 SsChannel l10 gt lsm gt ON 25 000000 0 0000009 10 Channel 11 l sm s 0 ON OFFs25 00000080 0000004 11 Channel 12 lsm OFFs25 00000080 0000004 110 pm 69 274 Fig 8 34 log db chan conf file view example User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER File log db log fil
108. to control linearly or bistably remote modules Controlling processes can drive built in physical outputs or virtual outputs which can be used as inputs to logical channels User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 3 TECHNICAL DATA Power supply voltage depending on version External Fuse required Power consumption Display depending on version Sensor power supply output Basic communication interfaces Digital input Optional communication module Optional input modules Optional output modules Protection level USB interface on rear panel USB interface from front Housing type Housing material 85 230 260V AC DC 50 60 Hz or 19 24 50V DC 16V 24 35V AC T type max 2A typically 15 VA max 20 VA 3 5 or 5 7 TFT color graphic display 320 x 240 pixels with LED backlight 24V DC x 5 max 200 mA RS 485 8N1 2 Modbus RTU 1200 bit s 115200 bit s USB Host port USB Device port 1 input 0 15 24V DC galvanic isolation low state 0 1 high state 8 24V power consumption 7 5 mA 24V isolation 1min 500V DC Second USB Host port Serial RS 485 and RS 485 RS 232 Ethernet 10M RJ 45 4 8 16 24x Voltage 0 10V Current 0 20 16 24 NTC 0 100k Voltage 0 10V Current 0 20mA Digital TTL HTL Isolated current 4 20mA 4 6x RTD Pt100 Pt500 Pt1000 Cu50 Cu100 4 8x 12 TC J K S T N R E L GOST 8 16 24x Digital input 3
109. value 0 kW Input value 1000 Output value 1 kW 3 Function Select one option Function X Y Source X Log ch 20 Current 2 g contiguration Fig 7 59 Math function configuration example window on the screen To do this enter the Group menu and turn it on if its off Name parameter write Heater for Channels block parameters Slot 1 parameter set as logical channel 22 called the Power e Slot2 parameter set as logical channel 21 called the Voltage e Slot 3 parameter set as logical channel 20 called the Current 114 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER e other parameters in this block Slot 4 5 6 set as disabled because we want to show only three logical channels all other parameters should be on default settings Group enabled Display options Name Heater Charts horizontal Bars horizontal Line width 2 pixels Time scale 19 sec Background white Channels Slot 1 Log ch 22 Power ThemesSlot1 Slot 2 Log ch 21 Voltage mew Slot 3 Log ch 20 Current Slot 4 disabled Slot 5 disabled Themeslot5 Slot 6 empty Logging options Mode disabled Fig 7 60 Example of Group configuration The last step is to define the Initial view see Fig 7 61 displayed on the LCD screen when the device st
110. value Math function Controller Profile timer Mode Data from other channel This mode is similar to Profile timer mode but instead of using the signal generated by the Profile timer the number of cycles elapsed by the profile is transferred to the logical channel Cycle counter is generated depending on the Looping parameter value ie when Looping disabled the cycle counter is equal to 0 The parameters of the Logical channel in Profile timer cycle counter mode should be 108 Name it gives the name to the logical channel Unit for Built in modules it will automatically use the default Unit to change the unit use the Scaling parameter in Processing parameter block to create unit use the Scaling parameter for more information see Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Mode Profile timer in this parameter user selects the source of data for the logical channel Source this parameter allows the user to select a Profile timer from the list 8 Profiles timers are implemented in the device the selected option will be the data source for this logical channel Configure source this button allows the user to configure the Profile timer selected in the Source parameter For more information see below in this Chapter Latch parameter block allows the user to set the latch function which will hold the last value of a channel discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General
111. value it has following options 0 1 sec 1 sec 10 sec Totalize configuration submenu which contains totalizer settings e Reset now manual reset of the totalizer e Reset mode turns on and off reset from logical channel e Reset source allows to choose a logical channel from the list which will reset the totalizer when value in this channel will be greater than 0 Strobe mode turns on and off balance calculating from logical channel Strobe source allows to choose logical channel from list which will hold balance calculating in totalizer this do not reset the totalizer and do not stops flow measurement balance calculating is hold when value in this logical channel is equal or lower than zero e Counting direction turns on and off change of the counting direction e Direction source allow to choose a logical channel from the list which will change the counting direction counting direction will change when value in this channel will be greater than 0 7 9 5 6 Thermocouples sensor measurement modules TC modules are equipped in four eight or twelve thermocouple inputs and one input for connectors temperature measurement see Appendix 8 6 TC4 TC8 TC12 THERMOCOUPLE SENSOR MEASUREMENT MODULES Primary destination of this module is temperature measurement using a thermocouple sensors but it is also possible to measure voltage in typical thermocouple ranges TC modules paramete
112. will be generated even if the generating signal will disappear However user should pay attention on the highlight hierarchy If the highlight variant with higher number is active and the highlight variant with lower number will appear generated will the one with lower number even if the Trig hold time of the first one will not expire e Trigger using this parameter user can choose the logical channel which will be the source of triggering for the channel highlight When in source channel there is a value S 0 then highlight is inactive and when there is a value gt 0 then highlight is active e Alarm level in this parameter user can choose is the highlight variant active when channel selected in Trigger parameter will returns an Err Hi or Lo alarm highlight selected highlight variant will not be active while alarm state in logical channel highlight forced selected highlight variant will be active while alarm state in logical channel e Color in this parameter user can set the background color and font color of the highlight variant Using arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen user can choose highlight variant which he wants to configure The middle button allows direct selection of a specific variant from the list 77 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Color Select colors mu Jm I mm Jem Fig 7 41 Color edit dialog Comments regarding
113. write OkW in Input value parameter in the Point 2 section write 1000 in Output value parameter in the Point 2 section write 1kW for Displaying block parameters Format parameter set as numeric Precision parameter set as 0 00 in Graph low parameter write OkW in Graph high parameter write 2kW we assume that the value of heater power consumption exceeds 2kW 5A 400V all other parameters should be on default settings 113 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Log channel Name Unit Mode Function Log channel Processing Scaling disab Filter type disab Displaying disabled linear _ offset user char Displayi In the next step you need to define Group the set up logical channels to view them in one Power 1 1 none Math function 1 J 1 Log c le Latch Log channel rocessing Scaling linear Configure sca C Filter type disabled Log channer Type of source Y channel Cm 2 Format numeric Function X Y Source X Log ch 1 Source Y Log ch 1 Inp CHEN RAEIES Name Power Unit none Mode Math function Function 20 21 S Point 1 Point 2 Precision 0 00 Digits all digits Graph low 0 kW Graph high 2 kW Inpu Output unit kW Input value 0 Output
114. x ba ZE RTD n16 GND converter RS 485 Fig 7 110 The connection scheme for RT4 module and Modbus 1 port In the first step we define Controller settings touch screen and press Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Controllers menu using the arrows tin the top navigation bar select any Controller such as 1 in Controller name parameter write Controller 1 Mode parameter set as PID in Dead zone parameter write 2 for Controller parameters parameter block in P coefficient parameter write 0 3 e in l coefficient parameter write 0 5 in D coefficient parameter write 0 02 e Differentiated signal parameter set as error deviation for Controller output parameter block in Offset parameter write 0 in Low output limit write 0 e in High output limit write 20 186 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER After leaving the configuration save settings In next steps we should set Logical channels examples of logical channel configuration are in Chapter 7 8 11 Examples of Logical Channels configuration especially Example 7 8 11 8 set Modbus for Slave device 9examples for Modbus configuration are in Chapter 7 15 4 Modbus Example of Modbus protocol configuration in the device examples of external outputs configuration which will communicate with Slave device via RS 485 are in Chapter 7 11 4 Examples of external output configurations Example 7
115. you plug the flash drive to the unit Then enter MENU gt File management gt Configuration Files If you want to Load configuration template the window panel will show a view of the contents of the flash drive with the available files for configuration file with extension cfg for Modbus template file with extension mcfg for Modbus slave template file with extension scfg Please note that the file name is defined by the user If the user wants to Save configuration Modbus template press the Save configuration Save Modbus template or Save Modbus slave template button A window appears with the available files that can be overwritten or a new file can be created by pressing button with keys symbol in the upper left corner see Fig 7 21 After confirming the write process the data is stored on the flash drive An example of configuration files in Fig 7 21 config 1 ru B config 2 B config 3 B config 4 config 5 E config 6 AED Fig 7 21 Example of logging and configuration files Permissions files Third button in the Files management menu is Permission files This menu is related with MultiLevel Access mode see Chapter 7 17 Access to that menu has only user logged as Administrator If no user is logged the administrator s password must be passed to open that menu see Fig 7 22 Enter Administrator password Fig 22 Enter password dialogue 51 User Manual For CONTROLLE
116. 0 6 Slope to 0 7200 0 sec k EJEA 2 hour s d hour Shape slope Duration defines duration of the section it depends on the Unit parameter Unit user can select available options second minute hour which sets unit of the Shape allows to choose shape of defined section const value slope Final value allows to set level for const value or the end value for slope for Definition of parameters The list is empty Please use button Shape slope Final value 12 eu Section num Duration 3 min Fig 7 99 Sample of Profile timer configuration 174 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Comments for Looping parameter If the user select counted or infinite repeats of the Profile timer the user has if the section from which begins the next repeat Profile timer is a ramp then in the whole duration of this section is linear generating the output signal from the final value of the previous section to final value this section This is shown in Fig 7 100 dashed line run profile if the section from which the next repeat of the Profile timer begins is a constant value then Profile signal quickly transient 0 1 seconds from the final value of the previous section to a constant value in this section This is shown in Fig 7 100 profile guided fine line
117. 0 A Graph low parameter set as 50 Graph high parameter set as 85 A All other parameters should be set as default Logical channel 7 Temperature measurement n Name parameter write Temperature Mode parameter set as Hardware input Source parameter set as Inp A4 Intern temp Precision parameter set as 0 0 In Graph low parameter write 50 In Graph high parameter write 85 Now go to Channel highlight submenu e Highlight color parameter set as 1 o Mode parameter set as permanent n Trig hold time parameter write 5 Trigger parameter set as logical channel named Calc Third level A Alarm state parameter set as no highlight go to Color parameter and set font color at the top of screen and background color at the bottom of the screen 81 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 82 e Highlight color parameter set as 2 Mode parameter set as blinking n Blink period parameter write 3 o In Trig hold time parameter write 3 Trigger parameter set as logical channel named Calc Second level A Alarm state parameter set as no highlight go to Color parameter and set font color at the top of screen and background color at the bottom of the screen e Highlight color parameter set as 3 o Mode parameter set as blinking o In Blink period parameter write 1 o In Trig hold time parameter write 1 Trigger parameter set as
118. 0 for Displaying block parameters Format parameter set as binary e in Off state text write LO with blue font color e in On state text write HI with red font color e in Graph low write 0 e in Graph high write 1 exit from Logical channels menu User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER In the next step you need to define Group the set up logical channels to view them in one window on the screen To do this enter the Group menu to enable the Group 1 if it is off in Name write Temp Measurment for Channels block parameters Slot1 parameter set as logical channel 1 called the Temperature 1 Slot2 parameter set as logical channel 2 called the Temperature A1 Slot 3 parameter set as logical channel 3 called the Temperature Slot 4 parameter set as logical channel 4 called the Temperature A4 e Slot 5 parameter set as logical channel 5 called the Alarm state Slot 6 parameter set as disabled all other parameters should be on default settings The last step is to define the Initial view displayed on the LCD screen when the device starts Initial View has to display a defined group of logical channels 1 2 3 4 5 in value mode To do this enter in the General settings menu Basic block parameters left unchanged unless indicated date and time were to set incorrectly and should be improved for LCD screen block parameters e Backlight parameter set to a value corresponding to the user for
119. 1 2 3 4 the result is the product of channels 1 2 3 4 MIN XTi The smallest value of selected value of the selected channels MIN 1 2 3 4 the result is lowest value of the selected channels 1 2 3 4 MAX The largest value of selected value of the selected channels MAX 1 2 3 4 the result is highest value of the selected channels 1 2 3 4 99 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Math function Description Example ANY X i gt Y The result 1 if the value of any set ANY 1 2 3 4 gt 5 if the of selected channels is greater than value of any set of channel 1 the value of the channel or constant 2 3 4 is greater than the value Y value of the channel 5 then the result is 1 otherwise it will be 0 ALL X i Y The result 7 1 if all values of ALL 1 2 3 4 5 the result selected channels are greater than is 1 if all values of channels the value of the channel or constant 1 2 3 4 are greater than the value Y value of the channel 5 ANY X i lt Y The result 1 if the value of any set ANY 1 2 3 4 lt 5 if the of selected channels is less than the value of any set of channel 1 value of the channel or constant 2 3 4 is less than the value value Y of the channel 5 then the result is 1 otherwise it will be 0 ALL X i Y The result 7 1 if all values of ALL 1 2 3 4 5 the result selected channels are smaller than the value of the channel or constant v
120. 124 12 current 24 voltage inputs 24 current inputs 12 voltage inputs IN1 N2 N3 N4 4 x 0 10V 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 20mA N5 N6 N7 N8 4 x 0 10V 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 20mA N9 IN10 IN11 IN12 4 x 0 10V 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 20mA IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 4 x 0 10V 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 10V IN17 IN18 IN19 IN20 4 x 0 10V 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 10V IN21 IN22 IN23 IN24 e c c e c c 28 e c 4 Md e 4 c r Md e e e ca 4 x 0 10V 4 x 0 20mA 101 n02 103 n04 05 106 108 109 10 n11 n12 n13 n14 n15 n16 n18 n19 n20 n21 n22 n23 n24 n25 n26 n28 n29 n30 4 x 0 10V Fig 8 3 Voltage and current measurement modules contd The Fig 8 2 and Fig 8 3 shows terminals placement of Ul modules Inputs are gathered into groups to make connections easier All ground terminals of a particular module are common but separated from power supply and other modules If it is necessary to measure Voltages with different ground potentials several UI modules have to be installed into CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER unit 227 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Most important parameters of Ul modules Ul4 UI8 Number of inputs 4xU 4 8xU Hardware limitations voltage inputs current inputs OV 12V OmA 24mA OV 12V OmA 24
121. 16 24 SOLID STATE RELAY DRIVERS MODULES Built in outputs parameters in PWM mode are Name each outputs already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it see Fig 7 77 Mode PWM this parameter allows the user to select method of operation the output Source this parameter contains a Logical channels list where the selected logical channel will be a data source for this built in output see Fig 7 78 Levels parameter block these parameters allow the user to set the range of the input signal which will change the duty cycle of the output signal is discussed below in this Chapter Timing parameter block these parameters allow the user to set the timing parameters of the output signal is discussed below in this Chapter Levels parameter block The parameters are Lower level and Upper level by setting these parameters the range is defined within which the change duty cycle of pulse depending on the source signal below this range the signal is zero zero width zero duty cycle and above this range the signal is completely filled fully on of the cycle period see Fig 7 86 Alarm level when the data source for the built in output returns Error state or the range being exceeded the low Lo state and high Hi state Alarm level parameter for the PWM mode allows setting the duty cycle of the output signal in time of alarm state according to the parameters of Lower level and Upper level 155 Use
122. 22mA 0 5V 0 6V 0 5V 0 6V voltage inputs 1 5V 0 6V 1 5 0 6V 0 10V 0 12 0 10 0 12V 2 10V 0 12 2 10V 0 12V 10 25mV 10 30mV 10 25mV 10 30mV 10 100mV 10 120mV 10 100mV 10 120mV 0 600mV 50 650mV 0 600mV 50 650 246 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER UN3 UN5 thermocouple inputs RTD inputs resistance input K S J T N R B E L GOST Pt100 Pt 100 Pt 50 Pt500 Pt 500 Pt1000 Cu50 Cu 50 Cu100 Cu 100 Ni100 Ni500 Ni1000 073000 0730000 K S J T N R B E L GOST Pt100 Pt 100 Pt 50 Pt500 Pt 500 Pt1000 Cu50 Cu 50 Cu100 Cu 100 Ni100 Ni500 Ni1000 073000 0730000 Connection method in RTD mode 2 3 and 4 wire switched manually 2 3 and 4 wire switched manually Input impedance current inputs voltage inputs thermocouple inputs 650 typ 300 gt 100kQ while maintaining correct polarization gt 1 5 650 typ 300 gt 100kQ while maintaining correct polarization gt 1 5 Precision current inputs voltage inputs thermocouple inputs 0 196 25 C for all ranges 0 196 25 C for ranges 0 5V 1 5V 0 10V 10 100mV 0 600mV 0 1596 25 C for range 10 25mV 0 1 25 C for ranges 073000 0730000 0 1 25 C for all ranges 0 1 25 C for ranges 0 5V 1 5V 0 10V 10 100mV 0 600mV 0 15 25 C for range 10 25mV 0 1 25 C for ranges 0 3000 0 30000 Tempe
123. 42 in S If the UN3 or UN5 module is installed the 24 DC output is available only devices equipped with PS42 power supply module In other cases there no 24V DC output available and these terminals remain not used Most important parameters of PS modules Number of inputs outputs Power supply 19V 24 50V DC 85V 230 260 AC DC 85V 230 260 AC DC 16V 24 35V AC 50 60Hz 50 60Hz USB SERVICE Service port Sensor power supply 24V DC 5 max 200mA output Digital input 0 15 24V DC with galvanic insulated low state 0 1V high state 8 24V power consumption 7 5 mA 24V insulation 1min Q 500V DC Interface RS 485 Modbus RTU 1200bit sec 115200 bit sec Weight Tab 8 1 Technical data for the power supply module PS3 PS4 and PS42 225 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 2 Ul4 UI12 U16 U24 116 124 VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MEASUREMENT MODULES UI4 UIS U16 116 4 current 8 current 16 voltage inputs 16 current inputs 4 voltage inputs 8 voltage inputs lt lt gt N o N x x Pe lt gt gt E e c T q x x x lt 5 gt i e x x S 2 2 x x Fig 8 2 Voltage and current measurement modules 226 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 20mA User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER UI12 U24
124. 4x0 100kO 4 x 0 10V 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 10V Fig 8 7 Mixed measurement modules 4 x 0 20mA 4 0 20 tree 4x D QOO id in30 com 21 24 The Fig 8 7 shows terminals placement of UIN UID modules Inputs are gathered into groups to make connections easier All ground terminals of a particular module are common but separated from power supply and other modules If it is necessary to make measurements with different ground potentials several UIN UID modules have to be installed into CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER unit 232 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Most important parameters of UIN UID modules UI4N8 UI4D8 UI8N8 UI8D8 Number of inputs 8x NTC resistive 4 1 4 0 4 1 4x U 8x D 8x NTC resistive 4 4 0 4 1 4x U 8xD Hardware limitations voltage input current input resistance input digital input 0 12V 0 24 0 110kQ 0 12V 0 24mA 0 110kO Hardware resolution voltage input current input resistance input digital input Precision voltage input current input resistance input digital input 0 1 25 0 1 25 0 1 25 0 1 25 0 1 25 2 25 0 1 25 0 1 25 0 1 25 0 1 25 0 1 25 2 25 Covered CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges voltage input current input resistance inp
125. 585 2001 PN EN 60584 1 1997 S J T N R E L B Tab 8 9 Thermocouple norm for the module TC4 TC8 TC12 241 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 7 RT4 RT6 RTD MEASUREMENT MODULES RT4 RT6 RTD 2 wire RTD 3 wire RTD 4 wire 4 RTD inputs 6 RTD inputs configuration configuration configuration md dy p mu z z z mal g nos NZ n04 n04 n04 gt N N hj b N lt lt st lt lt LO 2 lt Fig 8 12 RTD modules Most important parameters of RT4 and RT6 modules RT4 Number of inputs 4 Hardware measurement ranges 073250 0732500 Hardware resolution range 3250 range 32500 0 010 0 10 Covered CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges RTD resistance 242 Pt100 Pt 100 Pt 50 Pt500 Pt 500 Pt1000 Cu50 Cu 50 Cu100 Cu 100 0 3000 0 3kO Pt100 Pt 100 Pt 50 Pt500 Pt 500 Pt1000 Cu50 Cu 50 Cu100 Cu 100 0 3000 0 3kO User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER RT4 RT6 Resistance measurement precision 0 1 25 C 0 1 25 C Temperature stability 50 ppm C 50 ppm C Connection method 2 3 and 4 wire 2 3 and 4 wire switched manually switched manually Measurement wires resistance max 200 every wire max 200 every wire Sampling period 1s 1s Weight 42g 579 Due
126. 5x Universal input 2 4x Universal counter input 2 4x Hourmeter module 2 4x Flowmeter 2 4x Current input 2 4x Pulse input 2 4x Current input 4 6x Relay 5A 250V cos 1 8 12x Relay 1A 250V cos 1 8 16 24x SSR driver 10 15V up to 100mA per output 2 4 6 8x IO Passive current output 4 20mA IP 65 from front after using waterproof frame IP 54 from front with transparent door IP 40 from front standard IP 20 housing and connection clips IP 54 from front with transparent door IP 40 from front standard IP 20 housing and connection clips panel NORYL GFN2S E1 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Housing dimensions Mounting hole Assembly depth Panel thickness Operating temperature depending on version Storage temperature depending on version Humidity Altitude Screws tightening max torque Max connection leads diameter Safety requirements EMC Weight 96 x 96 x 100 mm small housing 3 5 Display or 144 x 144 x 100 mm big housing 5 7 Display 90 5 x 90 5 mm small housing 3 5 Display or 137 x 137 mm big housing 5 7 Display 102 mm max 5 mm 0 C to 50 C or 20 C to 50 10 C to 70 C or 20 C to 70 C 5 to 90 no condensation up to 2000 meters above sea level 0 5 Nm 2 5 mm according to PN EN 61010 1 installation category II pollution degree 2 voltage in relation to ground 300V AC iso
127. 8 D16 16 e inputs M n04 i in05 cow 1 4 n06 07 08 o n09 10 5 8 IN21 in11 N9 n12 N10 wn IN19 n14 IN42 in15 cow 9 12 in16 N13 IN14 n18 IN15 IN20 in19 IN16 P in20 13 16 D24 24 Digital inputs 01 n04 COM 1 4 IN5 IN6 nds IN7 o9 in09 ins n10 lt 5 8 n IN10 n13 IN11 n14 lt iN12 in15 4 9 12 we IN31 n17 IN14 18 IN15 o9 119 lt iN16 in20 com 13 16 21 IN17 n22 m18 L IN29 n23 lt N19 in24 N20 COM 17 20 IN21 lt IN22 lt _ 23 30 in29 N24 J 30 com 21 24 Fig 4 17 Digital input modules 25 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 26 CP2 2 universal counters Inp11 Inp12 Res1 Prg1 gt Counter 1 gt Counter 2 CP4 4 universal counters Inp11 Inp12 Res1 Res2 COM2 Inp31 Inp32 Prg1 Counter 1 gt Counter 2 gt Counter 3 gt Counter 4 HM2 2 hourmeters 01 START STOP 1 02 lt PRG 1 03 lt cow 1 04 lt START STOP 2 05 PRG 2 08 lt 2 HM4 4 hourmeters STARTISTOP 1 PRG1 COM1 4 START STOP 2 PRG2 2 START STOP 3 PRG 3 COM 3 3 J START STOP 4 lt PRG 4 4 Fig 4 18 Universal counters and hourmeters modules User Manual For CONTROLLE
128. A rar I Current regulator o Out 4 20mA QO Current regulator oqo Out 4 20mA or H Current regulator AZ ta ETA Md S Kj Interface Main board Fig 8 30 Internal structure of the Passive current outputs module 267 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 15 COMMUNICATION MODULES isolated ee USB host RJ 45 ETH USB USB host Fig 8 31 Communication modules ACM ETU and USB back USB host only Most important parameters of ACM ETU and USB modules USB back Number of inputs outputs 1 Input output type RS 485 RS 232 RS 485 USB host RJ 45 ETH USB host RJ 45 ETH USB host Hardware output limitation USB host max current output 100mA USB host max current output 100mA USB host max current output 100mA Baudrate RS 485 bit sec 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 RJ 45 ETH 10Mb sec USB host 12Mb sec RJ 45 ETH 10Mb sec USB host 12Mb sec USB host 12Mb sec Data format RS 232 485 8N1 8N2 8E1 8E2 801 802 Weight 268 48g Tab 8 24 Technical data for the communication module User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 16 DATA FORMAT Introduction Every d
129. A RECORDER 7 9 5 Built in inputs Modules 7 9 5 1 Voltage and current measurement modules UI modules are equipped in eight sixteen or twenty four voltage or current inputs but there are also modules where hall of their inputs are voltage and other half are current see Appendix 8 2 Ul4 UI8 412 U16 U24 116 124 VOLTAGE and CURRENT MEASUREMENT MODULES To make sensor connection easier inputs are grouped and all ground terminals are common but separated from power supply and other modules Voltage inputs parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays measurement unit V Mode defines measurement range Low limit defines measurement level bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state Current inputs parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays measurement unit mA Mode defines measurement range Low limit defines measurement level bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be
130. A1 Input levels Fig 7 88 Menu of the Passive current output The parameters of built in output for Current outputs module are Name each outputs already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it see Fig 7 77 Unit defined permanently it occurs only for Current output Source this parameter contains a Logical channels list where the selected logical channel will be a data source for this built in output data from this source are calculated according to parameters gathered in Input levels and Output levels blocks Input levels parameter block determine the range of data source for this built in output this block has parameters Lower level and Upper level these parameters limit the range of the input signal selected in Source parameter below this range input signal will have Lower level value and above this range the signal will have Upper level value 157 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Output levels parameter block determine the range of output value this block has the following parameters Lower level and Upper level these parameters limit range of the output signal below this range input signal will have Lower level value and above this range the signal will have Upper level value relationship between Lower and Upper levels is linear and it is limited by defined range see Fig 7 90 e Alarm level this parameter defines output value when alarm stat
131. BRR BEBE BBHE LI Ata gt COWCO o T v EESTI a 2 v Fig 7 3 Text editor special symbols Fig 7 4 Text editor example diacritical letters 43 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Graph low Enter value 99999 99999 C RI EE mm EE E LS rr rrr abc 123 142 ese Fig 7 5 Text editor font and background Fig 7 6 Value editor decimal form color selection Register number Data mask Enter value 0 65535 Enter value 0 OxXFFFF 1101 0110 1101 1101 111 111 000 000 lt gt Fig 7 8 Value editor binary form Source X Select one or many options Log ch 1 input 1 Log ch 2 input 2 Log ch 3 input 3 Log ch 4 input 4 Log ch 5 input 5 C Log ch 6 input 6 1 Ea Fig 7 10 Multiple choice type editor E Month Select one option Grupa 04 Select one or many options Start 2010 06 09 10 53 12 463 stop 2010 06 09 10 53 38 13 Logging temperature 1 Start 2010 06 09 10 53 38 148 stop 2010 06 09 10 53 59 31 Logging temperature 2 Z Start 2010 06 09 10 53 59 331 stop 2010 06 09 10 54 21 58 Logging temperature 3 Z Start 2010 06 09 10 54 21 594 stop 2010 06 09 10 54 45 81 Logging temperature 4 Start 2010 06 09 10 54 45 814 stop 2010 06 09 10 55 17 63 Logging temperature 5 Start 2010 06 09 10 55 17 642 L
132. ECORDER in Low limit parameter write 100 e High limit parameter write 600 C for Displaying parameter bloc Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 0 in Graph low parameter write 0 C e Graph high parameter write 100 C For Relay output configuration 160 touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Built in outputs menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select a relay output which is connected to heater For this example it is the output named Out C1 Relay see Fig 7 91 Mode parameter set as below level because we want the relay to switch on when the temperature will be lower than 30 C Source parameter set as Log ch 1 Feedback which returns Pt100 sensor temperature Alarm state parameter set as immed OFF for Levels parameter block Level mode parameter set as value in Level parameter write 30 C e in Hysteresis parameter write 5 C the relay will switch on below 25 and switch off above 35 C all other parameters should be on default settings User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example 7 10 5 2 Application of output for IO modules see Appendix 8 14 102 104 106 IO8 PASSIVE CURRENT OUTPUT Task Assume that Logical channel 1 indicates pressure in range 100 500 bars and its result should be regenerated to current output in corresponding range 4 20 Sol
133. ER DATA RECORDER Logical channel operating as PID controller generates analog output signal This signal can be limited to range suitable for used output On the other hand all built in outputs has settings allowing to fit them to source signal see 7 10 3 Build in output PWM Pulse width modulation mode for SSR relay output or 7 10 4 Built in output Current output It is user s responsibility to choose correct limitation of PID output as well as other PID settings but important is to set limitation range wide enough to obtain smooth controlling of actuator and narrow enough to make PID as fast as possible We can assume that PID output range is set as 0 100 To set this user should enter Controller menu select requested controller and in Controller output parameters block set Offset 0 Low output limit O High output limit 100 Other PID controller settings depends only on application Lets assume that user has to use TC signal K for temperature measurement module TC4 installed in slot A and SSR output driver module S8 installed in slot C to control a heater keeping set temperature of the object Lets assume that temperature setpoint can be set between 120 and 200 C To realise this task user needs at least 3 logical channels and 1 set of Controller settings Logical channel 1 Measurement of temperature Logical channel 2 Setpoint of temperature Logical channel 3 PID controller Controller 1
134. Input list button to define the register to read the Input list is empty press the sign to add input channel if the list has defined the input channels use the arrows in the upper right corner to select the input channels the Value register parameter set Register type HOLDING using 03h function to read the holding registers as specified by the Modbus RTU Register number 1h the number of the read register Data format 16 bits signed the choice of format depends on SLAVE device register format Data shift 0 because we do not want to move data read from Slave device Data mask OxFFFF which reads the whole value of register exit the Value register parameter menu 215 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 216 inthe Decimal point parameter select option exp point register causes that will be appear a new parameter to appear Decimal point register that causes an automatic change of decimal point depending on value of Decimal point register the Decimal point register parameter set Register type HOLDING A Register number 3h Data format 16 bits unsigned Data shift 0 Data mask 0x0003 because the interest to us only the first 2 bits changing register value the value of which determines the decimal point exit after the settings this menu HI state parameter set as if register value in the HI register param
135. Log ch 5 Sector 5 C 17 Slot 6 disabled lw v 35 gt 0 4 350 57 35 CH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS G01 Hall temperature Fig 7 120 Sample of Group parameters settings Slots set to Logical channel and set to disabled Select colors Example Example Example m m mmm G01 Hall ieri 2012 07 26 01 Hall Temperature _0 54 L0 57 0 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Fig 7 121 Style color select screen and examples of views with changed styles 7 14 2 Groups Logging options Logging options are available only in the device having a license to log the data for more information about the logging license see Chapter 7 4 DEVICE INFORMATION LICENCE FIRMWARE UPDATE REMOTE DISPLAY EXPORT MANUAL AND RENEW CONFIGURATION To log the data from the Logical Channel should be Logical channel attached to Group using the Channels parameter block see Chapter 7 14 1 Groups General settings enable the data logging by setting the options in block of parameters gt Logging options after exiting the menu accept the changes by writing configuration received logging data files can be sent to flash drive form more information about files management see Chapter 7 3 FILES MANAGEMENT Each Group has its own data logging options and the device can log the 10 independent Groups of Logical channels at the same time 195 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER
136. MODULE enne 251 8 10 CP2 CP4 OPTOISOLATED UNIVERSAL COUNTERS MODUIES 253 8 11 HM2 OPTOIZOLATED HOURMETERS 256 8 12 S8 16 524 SOLID STATE RELAY DRIVERS 258 9 19 R45 ROT R65 R121 RELAY MODULE occa aids vests tase pha orar spun ma ARREA ikan 262 8 14 102 104 106 IO8 PASSIVE CURRENT 0 nnns 264 9 19 COMMUNICATION MODULE S ESEE ETEA EEA EER 268 DATA FORMA ee Enei 269 8 17 DIRECT ACCESS TO LOG FILES USING HTTP 278 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Explanation of symbols used in the manual operation of the device Not complying with the guidelines denoted by this symbol 1 This symbol denotes especially important guidelines concerning the installation and may cause an accident damage or equipment destruction IF THE DEVICE IS NOT USED ACCORDING TO THE MANUAL THE USER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR POSSIBLE DAMAGES This symbol denotes especially important characteristics of the unit Read any information regarding this symbol carefully 1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND USER SAFETY AN The manufacturer is not responsible for any damages caused by inappropri
137. Modbus MASTER Register settings a 211 7 15 3 4 Modbus MASTER Register blocks parameter block 212 7 15 4 Modbus Example of Modbus protocol configuration in the device 214 7 16 NETWORK AND REMOTE DISPLAY 5 220 17 ACCESS OPTIONS p 221 S AFPFENDIC 225 8 1 PS3 PS4 PS42 POWER SUPPLY nnn ns 225 8 2 Ul4 UI8 UI12 U16 U24 116 124 VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MEASUREMENT MODULES O rM 226 8 3 UI4N8 Ul4D8 UI8N8 UI8D8 MIXED UIN UID MODULES 232 8 4 156 ISOLATED CURRENT INPUTS MODUIE nnns 235 8 5 Fiz FT2 FT4 FLOWMETER MODULES 237 8 6 4 TC8 12 IHERMOCOUPLE SENSOR MEASUREMENT MODUIES 239 8 7 RT4 RT6 RTD MEASUREMENT MODUIES nnne nnne nnns 242 8 8 UN5 OPTOISOLATED UNIVERSAL INPUTS MODUIES 245 3 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 9 D8 D16 D24 OPTOISOLATED DIGITAL INPUTS
138. OUT 4 Logging active Fig 7 25 Device Information screens Pressing the MENU gt Device information button see Fig 7 24 will show window see example window information Fig 7 25 with basic information about software and hardware on the device such as Enter type of device serial number version of the software available free memory hardware configuration a list of installed modules number of slot module type network settings active licences licence key button see Fig 7 27 allows the user to enter a licence key purchased from the manufacturer or supplier enabling additional software options which enhance the functionality of the device After entering and accepting the licence key the device automatically starts up with new software options if the licence key for data logging is entered the text under the Licences heading appears as Logging the period of validity see Fig 7 27 Firmware update button see Fig 7 27 allows the user to update the device software To perform the update download the latest software version available form the multicon24 eu website unzip file and copy to a flash drive plug in the flash drive some high capacity Pendrives are not supported best choice is pendrive with 2GB capacity start the update process by pressing the Firmware update button see Fig 7 27 53 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Note on the update do not power off
139. R DATA RECORDER 261 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 282 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 283
140. R DATA RECORDER In this menu Administrator has access to two buttons Load configuration and Save configuration see Fig 7 23 which allows to store and move saved access settings using external USB flash drive That streamlines the process of setting up another devices It is the only way to save Access options settings see Chapter 7 17 main configuration file doesn t contain those settings Permission files Load configuration Save configuration Fig 7 23 Enter password dialogue 52 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 4 DEVICE INFORMATION LICENCE FIRMWARE UPDATE REMOTE_ DISPLAY EXPORT MANUAL AND RENEW CONFIGURATION k 3 Device information Fig 24 The button which will show information about the device The Device information menu gives basic information about the device and allows the user to enter a licence key for data logging perform a firmware update of the device run displaying on the remote screen and download a user manual to the flash drive Hardware configuration Device information Device information Device type MultiCon Slot D ACM Serial number 100041128 Network settings Version 1 07 2 2 25 0 MAC address 26 D5 91 70 28 50 Free memory 1566 MB IP address 192 168 1 162 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Slot A TC8 8 thermocouple inputs Default gateway 192 168 1 1 Slot B UI4 current and voltage inputs Licences v Slot C REL
141. R DATA RECORDER S8 S16 S24 8 SSR outputs 16 SSR outputs 24 SSR outputs 10 24V DC 10 24V DC Fig 4 19 SSR output modules 27 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 28 R45 4 rel relay outputs 5A 250V OUT1 n04 E zn OUT2 y OUT3 S outa B R81 8 relay outputs 1A 250V 5 OUT1 R65 6 relay outputs 5A 250V Y OUT2 27 a4 OUT1 OUT3 E Y OUT4 OUT5 N OUTS f ours nog OUT7 20 OUTS outa m2 27 ours m5 20 175 OUT6 m8 Fig 4 20 Relay output modules R121 12 relay outputs 1A 250V n01 OUT1 5 J 818 8 8 8 8 2 21881818188 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER IO2 2 current output 3 e N PASSIVE c N PASSIVE c 104 4 current output n08 Fig 4 21 Passive current output modules OUT 4 COD PASSIVE eee c PASSIVE c N PASSIVE c IO6 6 current output 3 J PASSIVE D PASSIVE I COD PASSIVE ess COD PASSIVE c c c c c N c IO8 8 current output c I 5 J PASSIVE c PASSIVE c
142. RSAL INPUTS MODULES UN3 UN5 RTD 2 wire RTD 3 wire RTD 4 wire 3 universal inputs 5 universal inputs configuration configuration configuration hm z cN cN z z init V mA TC mV z RDN Z n16 V mA _ TC Z RN Z 21 mA TC mV LO RDN Z Fig 8 13 Universal input modules UN3 and UN5 are modules with 5 and 3 universal inputs current measurements voltage measurements temperature measurements TC or RTD 245 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Most important parameters of UN3 and UN5 modules UN3 UN5 Number of inputs 3 5 Hardware limitations current inputs 2mA 30mA 2mA 30mA voltage inputs 1V 12V 1V 12V 15 30mV 15 30mV 15 120mV 15 120mV 50 650mV 50 650mV thermocouple inputs 15mV 30mV 15mV 30mV 15mV 120mV 15mV 120mV RTD inputs 073250 04 3250 0732500 0732500 Hardware resolution current inputs 1 1A voltage inputs for range 1 12 V 1 mV 1 for range 15 30 mv 2 2 uV for range 15 120 mV 4 uV 4 uV for range 50 650 mV 40 uV 40 uV thermocouple inputs range 15mV 30mV 2uV 2uV range 15mV 120mV 4uV 4uV RTD inputs range 043250 0 010 0 010 range 0432500 0 20 0 20 Permissible Long time overload 2096 20 Covered CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges type max type max 0 20 0 22 0 20 0 22 current inputs 4 20mA 4 22mA 4 20mA 4
143. SERVICE GND 24V DC 5 Imax 200mA digital input 0 15 24V DC ND 6 8 2 A A2 Thermocouple Thermocouple Thermocouple Thermocouple Thermocouple Thermocouple Thermocouple Fig 7 70 Schematic diagram for the TC8 module To configure logical channels for reading temperatures from 1 8 inputs names Temperature 1 Temperature 2 etc should follow the same way as in Example 7 8 11 2 For Logical channel in Math function mode calculated an average value touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any logical channel except 1 8 such as 9 in Name parameter write Mean value Mode parameter set as Math function enter Function submenu to select the appropriate function that allows the calculation of the mean value e Function parameter set as Mean Xi 126 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER e Source X parameter select logical channels 1 8 which was defined as a reading of the thermocouples temperature X error handling parameter set as errors forwarded to result for Displaying block parameters e Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 e in Graph low parameters write 200 C
144. TA RECORDER contains the main processor display with touch screen Switch Mode Power Supply in one of two versions 19V 24 50V DC 16V 24 35V AC and 85V 230 260V AC and basic communication interfaces USB and RS485 see Fig 4 8 most far left connectors All other modules are optional and can be installed inside the device according to customer s needs Next to the basic connectors is the slot for an advanced communication module In the simplest version this module can be equipped only with rear USB Host connector this is standard for the IP 65 version of the CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER The full version of this module contains also 2 additional serial ports RS485 and RS485 RS232 and a 10Mb Ethernet RJ 45 connector see Fig 4 22 Three slots designed for built in hardware inputs and outputs are installed on the right side of the case see Fig 4 8 terminals marked slot A slot B and slot C The number and size of these terminals varies depending on module type Brief descriptions of available modules are shown in Fig 4 9 Fig 4 22 Measurement and actuator modules are constantly being developed so the current list of available modules varies visit manufacturers website to check current list of CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER modules Basic measurement modules are 4 8 16 24x Voltage Current input module 16 24x NTC Voltage Current Digital input module Isolated current input module 2 4 flowmeter 2 4x current
145. TD see the connection in Fig 7 65 enter Source configuration submenu e Mode parameter set as Pt1000 3 wire Low Limit parameter write 100 e in High Limit parameter write 600 C 120 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER for Display block parameters e Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 0 because Pt1000 sensor precision allows to display its value with one decimal place Graph low parameter write 15 C e in Graph high parameter write 30 C Other channels set in the same way Logical channel 31 Warehouse Logical channel 32 Basement in Source configuration set Mode parameter as PT100 Logical channel 33 Corridor Source configuration set Mode parameter as PT100 In the next step you need to define Group the set up logical channels to view them in one window on the screen To do this enter the Group menu to enable the e g Group 2 if it is off for Display options block parameters in Name parameter write Workplace Bars parameter set as vertical for Channels block parameters Slot 1 parameter set as Logical channel 30 called the Office e Slot 2 parameter set as Logical channel 31 called the Warehouse e Slot 3 parameter set as empty Slot 4 parameter set as Logical channel 32 called the Basement e Slot 5 parameter set as Logical channel 33 called the Corridor e Slot 6 parameter set as empty for Logging options block para
146. TION or when the logging option is activated but is disabled green color after activation the data logging option indicator changes to green when the data logging is enabled for more information about setting data logging see Chapter 7 14 2 Groups Logging options 37 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER AN yellow color It is possible to log data in the device but there is less than 10MB of free memory remaining to clear the memory you need to move onto a removable flash drive any important data logging files and possibly the Modbus templates after which remove them from the device more information see Chapter 7 3 FILES MANAGEMENT red color warning about the lack of space on memory card meaning data logging would not be possible until space is freed in the memory how to remove data and exchange data with a flash drive is shown in Chapter 7 3 FILES MANAGEMENT alternately blinking green with a blue color when the indicator flashes blue the logged data is moved to memory Note at this time you must not turn off the device because it may cause a loss of recently logging data In order to turn off the device especially when the data logging is ON it is recommended to use the safe off device by pressing the button Safe shutdown in the main menu see Fig 7 14 6 3 2 Navigation bar The touching the screen at any place causes the Navigation bar to display see Fig 6 3 which allows the user to sw
147. TROLLER DATA RECORDER e quad 4 counter becomes an encoder element used to measure pulses on inputs using quad method Direction of counter value changes depends on input 1 2 state 0 down 1 up and counting take place when on input 2 1 rising edge appears Thanks to this method user gains four times higher measurement resolution Reset now button which allows user to manually reset the counter Reset mode it allows to choose an additional resets for the counter it has following parameters e disable no additional resets e from log channel an additional reset is logical channel selected from list in Reset source parameter it is activated by high state e external an additional reset is Res input activated by high state both both of options shown above are active Reset source this parameter is visible when Reset mode is set as from log channel or both it contains a list of logical channels and the chosen one will reset the counter when its value is higher than 0 Prog inp mode specifies counter reaction on higher than 0 value appearance on Prog input it has following parameters e disable Prog input is inactive any changes on this input will be ignored e direction it allows to change mode or counting direction When Function mode parameter is set as A B active Prog input changes mode to B active Prog input changes mode to B A
148. User manual CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Firmware v 2 27 0 or higher G01 Group 1 Pumpflow SCinlettem SC outlet terr Tank inlet te Tank outlet Boiler Power l min C T C w 15 3 19 6 30 3 12 3 71 1 570 G01 Group 1 20 30 40 25 85 2000 76 65 75 4 81 28 0 0 0 0 10 0 26 40 11 26 45 11 4 SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS 85 40 0 P3 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS G01 Group 1 Pump flow Tankiinlet temp l min C G01 1 0 40 200 a 25 Pump T Jasus temp 5 P min UNS CN SC inlet temp 129 20 226 30 323 40 N 28 4 78 7 N gt N gt E X I 0 95 30 10 92 85 IS SC outlet temp Boiler Power W 0 65 Zo 75 Zo 81 Tank inlet temp me temp Boiler Power T E 35 7 292 123 25 736 5 85 454 2000 D 89 40 1 2000 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS S RS 475 lt 1000 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS M M 1g 49 10 85 0 2356 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Read the user s manual carefully before starting to use the unit or software Producer reserves the right to implement changes without prior notice 2014 05 14 CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER INSHAEN v 1 17 005 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER CONTENTS 1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND USER SAFFETY
149. VC Pity ty Channels p Slot 1 Log ch 1 Sector 1 Slot 2 Log ch 2 Sector 2 ZAN G01 Halltemperature 2911 02 0 G01 Halltemperature 2011 22 91 i a ERN Slot 3 Log ch 3 Sector 3 20 39 c 2450N 3 35 SN eot E sS x 17 5 11 5 Slot 4 Log ch 4 Sector 4 8 2 E Slot 5 Log ch 5 Sector 5 20 57 0 69 0 49 Sector 4 Sector 5 ore Slot 6 Log ch 6 Sector 6 m 2011 02 0 m 2011 02 0 G01 Halltemperature G01 Halltemperature 25252 Sector 1 Sector 1 T 20 ooa 0 57k 5 Sector 5 Sector 3 R 0 49 35 17 20 so BARNES En 4 Sector3 Channels A LI S Slot 1 Log ch 1 Sector 1 Slot 2 empty Slot 3 Log ch 3 Sector 3 Slot 4 empty SN S Slot 5 Log ch 5 Sector 5 a5 T 35 b lt Slot 6 empty m ID QUCH TH 40 08 1L45 081150 081 03 50 ATION KEYS Fig 7 119 Sample of Group parameters settings Slots set to Logical channel and set to empty 194 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER G01 Hall temperature 775 775 G01 Halltemperature 2011 02 0 Sector 1 Sector 1 C 0 57 35 20 Sector 3 1 0 49 35 17 Sector 5 t Sector3 Sector 5 me Channels 1 7 20 Slot 1 Log ch 1 Sector 1 as Slot 2 disabled e Slot 3 Log ch 3 Sector 3 7 19 Slot 4 disabled 08 27 24 Sector 1 Sector 3 el CU 35 Slot 5
150. VE device as defined in a specific address has its output list individually numbered Mode this parameter allows the user to select the method of the external output operation depending on source signal Source parameter it has options see Fig 7 80 and Fig 7 81 e disabled this external output is inactive e above level the result is a high state when the input data see Source parameter is above the level see Level parameter block e below level the result is a high state when the input data see Source parameter is below the level see Level parameter block inside range the result is a high state when the input data see Source parameter will be within the range see Level parameter block e outside range the result is a high state when the input data see Source parameter will be out of the range see Level parameter block Source this parameter contains Logical channels list where the selected logical channel will be data source for the external output Alarm state it allows the user to choose external output reaction on alarm state It occurs when the logical channel which is source for the external output returns Err Hi or Lo value This parameter has following options change means that at the time of an alarm state there is no change on the output immed OFF means that in times of alarm state the device immediately switches the output to low state immed means th
151. VE device while the configuration of Modbus in Master mode for example baud rate define the SLAVE device active output register list and etc is defined in the Modbus menu see Chapter 7 15 3 Modbus MASTER mode 7 11 1 External outputs General settings In the device there are as many external outputs as will be defined in the Modbus menu see Chapter 7 15 3 Modbus MASTER mode In case when the external outputs are not defined or inactive than in External outputs menu is an empty list External outputs can have a control type control type setting see Chapter 7 15 3 2 Modbus MASTER Device channels parameter block asarelay asalinear output View of External outputs menu is created for two types of control as a relay digital output and a linear output analog output is shown in Fig 7 92 and Fig 7 93 respectively External output number E Modbus port number port fusi ER SLAVE device address Device dar X Sci The name of SLAVE device Output channel number ouput chanel Gun 296049 The register number of SLAVE device ffode above leve HR HOLDING Register IN Source Log ch 1 Channel 1 w Relay mode Fig 7 92 View of External outputs menu for as a relay type control 162 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Ext out EA a 2 External outputs Select one option Comm port MB1 MASTER C MB1 Addr 1 0ut 1 analo
152. a uu N A uum PP 190 7 14 1 Groups General 190 7 14 2 Grups LOGGING ODO m EA ENS 195 7 14 3 Groups Examples of visualisations Of groups 197 TG D SiS uum 199 7 15 1 Modbus General Sells user eoa tuas t deesinstsadneiiededebvalsssivadeuersiesveaseadnaeasSeeat enesdenasees 200 7 15 2 e IEPcEiizui 200 7 15 2 1 Modbus SLAVE Modbus Templates for SLAVE 201 7 15 2 2 Modbus SLAVE Device channels for SLAVE mode 202 7 15 2 3 Modbus SLAVE The Modbus protocol handling 204 7 15 2 4 Modbus SLAVE List of registers 204 7 15 2 5 Modbus SLAVE Transmission errors handling 206 7 15 2 6 Modbus SLAVE Example of query answer frames 206 7 15 3 Modbus MASTER modqde tecssectscisserpaverensebe 207 7 15 3 1 Modbus MASTER Device templates parameter block 208 7 15 3 2 Modbus MASTER Device channels parameter 209 7 15 3 3
153. ables the visibility of special characters General data structure Data obtained from device by copying them on drive have fixed structure In flash drive s main directory is a folder which name is the same as device s serial number All main_log bin_TYPE files are placed into this directory The TYPE can be cons_dev_info dev_settings event_log logs Additionally there are folders with the log data Name of the folder is the same as internal log name from file main_log bin_logs Every data folder contains following files 270 log db_TYPE log settings files The TYPE can be e chan_conf channels settings cConf xml internal device settings group_settings group settings e log files list of data files User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER partX db_TYPE log data files X is a number decimal format without a leading zero of data file the same as file number stored in log db log files The TYPE can be raster samples interval samples samples data e timestamp samples synchronization points main log data format description Contains informations about logging functionality There can be following types of data const dev info information specific to this device logs data describing current and past logs stored on device Formatted as follows e log index index of logged group e internal log name e date when log was created e date when
154. alue Y is 1 if all values of channels 1 2 3 4are less than the value of the channel 5 X i selected by Y The result is a value of channel from list of channel X which selected by the value of channel Y 1 2 3 4 selected by 5 by the value of the channel 5 is selected appropriate value from channels 1 2 3 4 for value S 0 of channel 5 will be selected value of channel 1 for value 0 12 of channel 5 value of channel 2 for value 1 2 of channel 5 gt value of channel 3 for value 22 of channel 5 value of channel 4 see the Example 7 8 11 1 Chapter 7 8 11 sin X Sine of Source X value sin 17 sine value of channel 17 arcsin X Arcsine of Source X value arcsin 8 arcsine value of channel 8 cos X Cosine of Source X value cos 4 cosine value of channel 4 arccos X Arccosine of Source X value arccos 1 arccosine value of channel 1 tan X Tangent of Source X value tan 2 tangent value of channel 2 100 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Math function Description Example arctan X Arctangent of Source X value arctan 4 arctangent value of channel 4 cot X Cotangent of Source X value cot 10 cotangent value of channel 10 arccot X Arccotangent of Source X value arccot 3 arccotangent value of channel 3 Exponentiation involving two numbers the base of Source X value and the exp
155. any other logical channels or it can be the data source for output to the control and settings of any object To create Profile timer the Logical Channel should be set in Profile timer mode as in Fig 7 56 Los camne PARNEJ Mame Channel 1 1 Unit none Made Profile timer Source P T1 Profile 1 Configure source vw Fig 7 56 View of the input channel configuration in Profile timer mode The parameters of the Logical channel in Profile timer mode should be 106 Name it gives the name to the logical channel Unit to create unit use the Scaling parameter in Processing parameter block for more information see Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Mode Profile timer in this parameter user selects source of data for logical channel Source this parameter allows the user to select a Profile timer from the list 8 Profiles timers are implemented in the device which selected option will be data source for this logical channel User must configure the selected Profile timer by pressing the Configure source button or enter into the Profiles timers menu overview and configuration parameters that define the Profiles timers can be found in Chapter 7 12 PROFILES TIMERS Configure source this button allows the user to configure Profile timer selected in the Source parameter For more information see below in this Chapter User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Latch parameter
156. arts Initial View has to display a defined group of logical channels power voltage and current in needle mode To do this enter in the General settings menu Basic block parameters left unchanged unless indicated date and time were to set incorrectly and should be improved Backlight parameter set as a value corresponding to the user for example the value of 80 115 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER the Screen saver block parameters set to disabled mode as in this example we want to display all the time Backlight with the same clarity for Initial view block parameters Display mode parameter set as needles e Displayed group parameter set as Group 1 Heater for Automatic view change block parameters e Change mode parameter set to disabled as in this example we want to all the time displayed only Group 1 in the same needle mode after setting all parameters exit the General settings menu GENERAL Screen saver Mode disabled Initial view Display mode needles Displayed group Save changes Revert changes 01 Heater kW d 21 3 9 0 76 EN xs 2 E _ 0 71 x 4 Current th A I 3 6 20 2 55 X 3 _ 0 1 TOUCH THE SCREEN SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Fig 7 62 Main page view after saving configuration Finally you must exit the menu by pressing the Save changes button
157. at in times of alarm state the device immediately switches the output to high state e timed OFF means that in times of alarm state the device switches the output to low state after time delay set in Timing parameter block e timed ON means that in times of alarm state the device switches the output to low state after time delay set in Timing parameter block Levels block parameter these parameters allow the user to set range of changes of the output depending on the input signal is discussed below in this Chapter Timing parameter block these parameters allow the user to set delay time change the output state and minimum duration of the output state is discussed below in this Chapter User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Levels parameter block see Fig 7 80 Fig 7 81 and Fig 7 82 This parameters depends on the Mode parameter The options are Level this parameter defines the source signal level at which the output switches the state from low to high state or from high to low state occurs for the mode above level above the level we get high state at the output e below level below the level we get high state at the output Lower level and Upper level these parameters define the range at which a switch the output state from low to high state or vice versa from high to low state occurs for the mode e inside range if the input data is within the defined range at the output we get high state
158. ata obtained from device have fixed text format This format can be expanded in the future with backwards compatibility Here are some principles that are used in the generated data To download data manually and load into delivered PC software file structure must be the same as described below f not stated otherwise all data is a text in which subsequent columns are separated by tabs f not stated otherwise all index numbers are counted from zero All text data have a standard Unix line ending make sure to convert them correctly under Microsoft Windows systems Do not assume that at the end of the file is an end of line character despite its possible presence f not stated otherwise all dates are stored in the following format 24 hour clock YYYY MM DD hh mm ss zzz where e YYYY year month e DD day e hh hour minute 55 second 222 fraction of a second Current measurements data format Text data have two columns channel index in decimal notation channel value decimal point is a dot There can be other value than number e inf indicates that the channel is in LO state e inf indicates that the channel is in state nan indicates that the channel value is unspecified e g channel is in ERR state or is disabled Example channel 1 to 6 measurements 0 1 003 1 2 234 2 inf 3 inf 4 nan 5 123 223 First col
159. ate installation not maintaining the proper environmental conditions and using the unit contrary to its assignment Installation should be conducted by qualified personnel During installation all available safety requirements should be considered The fitter is responsible for executing the installation according to this manual local safety and EMC regulations GND input of device should be connected to PE wire The unit must be properly set up according to the application Incorrect configuration can cause defective operation which can lead to unit damage or an accident If in the case of a unit malfunction there is a risk of a serious threat to the safety of people or property additional independent systems and solutions to prevent such a threat must be used The unit uses dangerous voltage that can cause a lethal accident The unit must be switched off and disconnected from the power supply prior to starting installation of troubleshooting in the case of malfunction Neighbouring and connected equipment must meet the appropriate of appropriate standards and regulations concerning safety and be equipped with adequate overvoltage and interference filters Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify the unit yourself The unit has no user serviceable parts Defective units must be disconnected and submitted for repairs at an authorized service centre AN In order to minimize fire or electric shock hazar
160. block allows the user to set the latch function which will hold the last value of a channel discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Processing parameter block is used for scaling and filtering data discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Displaying parameter block for these parameters the user select format and range of data displayed on the screen discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings User must configure the Profile timer parameters in the Profiles timers menu 1 before using this Profile timer to control real object To read about Profiles timers profiles see Chapter 7 12 PROFILES TIMERS Configure source button in Profile timer menu There are two methods for configuring Profiles timers the Profiles timers menu following steps MAIN gt Device configuration Profiles timers see Chapter 7 12 PROFILES TIMERS directly in the Logical channel in Profile timer mode by pressing the Configure source button View of window of configuration the profile timer in both cases is the same Overview of setting profile timer is presented in Chapter 7 12 PROFILES TIMERS 107 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 8 9 Logical Channels Profile timer cycle counter mode MENU Device configuration d Logical channel n 4 ECHTE Sa counter disabled Hardware input Hardware output monitor Modbus Set point
161. bmenu where the details of the Modbus register can be set Register type a user can select two types HOLDING holding registers of SLAVE device compatible with the Modbus protocol INPUT input registers of SLAVE device compatible with the Modbus protocol Write mode this parameter for HOLDING register type allows the user to select whether the register is to be read only or read write for INPUT type this parameter is read only Register number read only parameter the assignment of registers to logical channels and other MultiCon parameters see Chapter 7 15 2 4 Modbus SLAVE List of registers Data format we can select one of these options 32 bits signed integer value the most significant bit is the sign bit 32 bits unsigned integer value without information about the sign 32 bits float floating point IEEE 754 format 32 bits BCD unsigned BCD value write two digits in each byte 32 bit reading this parameter is only for 32 bit format user can select one of these options two 16 bit registers o 32 bit register Ordering this parameter is only for 32 bit formats the letters ABCD means A most significant byte of high words word 2 bytes B least significant byte of the high words C most significant byte of low words D least significant byte of the low words ABCD standard Data shift read only paramete
162. ce For MultiLevel Access mode there is a possibility to login by connecting your own USB flash drive to the device later called Hardware key The Hardware key allows user to login without using password but only by plugging the key into the device Removing the hardware key causes immediate logout One key can be assigned to one user only and also user can only have one key Hardware key options are available with a device having Access Dongle licence activated only for more information about the license key see Chapter 7 4 DEVICE INFORMATION LICENCE FIRMWARE UPDATE REMOTE DISPLAY EXPORT MANUAL AND RENEW CONFIGURATION Access options parameters are Access mode allows to select protection mode from unauthorized usage single level protects whole menu from unauthorized changes with one password User which is currently logged in can freely configure the device until manual or automatic logout e MultiLevel allows to configure settings for Administrator and up to 15 users with different access levels and independent passwords Access password password which is required to log in while using single level access mode unless it s left empty Access timeout time in minutes which will elapse from last interaction with the device to automatic logout Value of 0 means that the user will be logout immediately after closing protected menu Each new attempt to entry into the protected menu will require a passwor
163. cimal point for Logical Channels 2 60 L IEEE 754 standard Float point format represents data as precision as possible Integer 32 represents value with constant precision selected by decimal point position When decimal is set for example 0 0 then Int32 format represents integer part of the value contained in float registers and multiplied by 10 e g float is 1 2345 0 0 then Integer 12 Similarly when decimal pint is 0 000 then integer represents integer part of the value contained in float registers and multiplied by 1000 e g float is 1 2345 D P 0 0 then Integer 1234 Tab 7 7 List of register available in the device 205 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 15 2 5 Modbus SLAVE Transmission errors handling If during reading or writing one of registries an error occurs then the unit shall return the frame containing the error code according to the Modbus protocol Error codes should be interpreted as follows 01h illegal function only functions 03h 06h and 10h are available 02h illegal register address 03h illegal data value 7 15 2 6 Modbus SLAVE Example of query answer frames The examples concern a unit with address 1 All values are given in the hexadecimal system Designations ADDR Address of the device in the system FUNC Function number REGH L Higher and lower part of registry number to which the command refers to COUNTH L Higher and lower part of registry counter numb
164. ck measured in this option the value of Feedback channel is directly sent to D term which allows the fast response of the device to fast changes with the controlled object deviation in this option the value of Feedback channel is send to D term after calculation of error output and checking exceeds the range of Dead zone this option is set for slow changes controlled object Controller output parameter block this block has parameters e Offset value of this parameter causes offset of controller output value Low output limit defines low limit of the controller output signal value High output limit defines high limit of the controller output signal value Initial conditions parameter block has following options e Init type has two options init internal state 0 during start of the controller its output is 0 state allows to set controllers output state during its start depending on Low output limit and High output limit parameters e Initial output parameter is visible for Init type Value defines controllers output state where 0 corresponds to Low output limit and 100 corresponds to High output limit Note After offset the output signal the output value is limited to the range set in Low output limit and High output limit parameters see Fig 7 109 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Fig 7 108 shows the block diagram of a control process
165. configuration G 4 S 25 0 7 e kPa 2 2 749 emperature Humidity 100 29 1 10 4 vemm PRZYCISKI 9 Fig 6 4 Methods for direct entry to Logical channel configuration 1 and Group configuration 2 6 3 3 Data panels The great deal of the screen is being used for channel visualisation Data can be presented in one of the following modes as numerical values as charts 8S bars as needle dials All channels of the current group are simultaneously presented in the same mode In the current version of software there is no possibility to mix different modes in one view Figures 6 6 6 11 show examples of different views The switching between visualisation modes can be done by pressing the buttons MODET or MODE in the Navigation bar see Chapter 6 3 2 Navigation bar Switching between groups can be done by pressing the buttons GROUPT or GROUP 39 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER E 04 Group 4 p 29110727 319 i DOTKNIJ EKRANU ABY POKAZAC PRZYCISKI Fig 6 5 View of the Data panel In all data panels a sample of a data panel is shown inside the frame marked 1 in Fig 6 5 the following information is available value of the logical channel denoted by 2 in Fig 6 5 data unit denoted by 3 channel s name denoted by 4 on some modes there is also a visible percentage indicator of the value in relation to it s full scale de
166. counting time when it detects another rising edge on this input e falling edge the device starts counting time when it detects falling edge on input signal The device stops counting time when it detects another falling edge on this input Reset now button which allows user to manually reset the counter Reset mode it allows to choose resets for the counter it has following parameters e disable no additional resets e from log channel an additional reset is logical channel selected from list in Reset source parameter it is activated by high state external an additional reset can be counters programmable input but Prog Inp mode parameter has to be set as reset in order to work it properly both both of options shown above are active but Prog Inp mode parameter has to be set as reset in order to work it properly Reset source this parameter is visible when Reset mode is set as from log channel or both it contains a list of logical channels and the chosen one Will reset the counter when its value is higher than 0 Prog inp mode specifies counter reaction on higher than 0 value appearance on PRG input it has following parameters e binary input signals on programmable input are not affecting counter s work but they are measured and can be used and displayed by setting source for logical channels as one of five for HM4 or three for HM2 last inputs which module offers for more details
167. d the unit must be protected against atmospheric precipitation and excessive humidity Do not use the unit in areas threatened with excessive shocks vibrations dust humidity corrosive gasses and oils Do not use the unit in areas where there is risk of explosions User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER T Do not use the unit in areas with significant temperature variations exposure to condensation or ice Do not use the unit in areas exposed to direct sunlight Make sure that the ambient temperature e g inside the control box does not exceed the recommended values In such cases forced cooling of the unit must be considered e g by using a ventilator The unit is designed for operation in an industrial environment and must not be used in a household environment or similar 1 1 THE USE OF TOUCH SCREEN Do not use pointers with sharp edges like tips of pencils and pens knifes scissors needles wires nails screws bolts etc while working with touch screen It is strongly recommended to use a special stylus made of plastic or another soft material with round ends for example the stylus delivered with the device The display of the CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER should also be protected against aggressive substances and extremely high and low temperatures see Chapter 3 TECHNICAL DATA 2 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS The CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER is a sophisticated multichannel unit which allows simultane
168. d once again Available only for MultiLevel Access mode Users list menu containing Administrator s and user s access settings Visible only for MultiLevel Access mode e Name used during authentication process e Password used for authentication selected user can be left empty e Permissions menu containing device s functionalities which can be assigned to the users Every user will get access to only those functionalities which were earlier assigned to his permission list e Access dongle number of the hardware key assigned to the user e Assign dongle button which assigns hardware key currently connected flash disk to selected user e Remove dongle button which removes earlier assigned hardware key Enter Password Fig 7 130 Single level password entering window 222 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Authentication User Administrator Access password Users list Select one option Administrator User 2 Mr Adams User 3 Service User 4 Mrs Kowalsky User 5 Production User 6 Flat surface conservator Fig 7 133 Administrator password window 223 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 38 0 SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Fig 7 134 Example of screen view with user logged in as a Administrator b User number 3 A Access denied A Wrong Password Fig 7 135 Access denied and Wrong password window d User 3 Ser
169. de allows the user to set up the PID control loop which may control the objects and Controller output signal for display on the screen processed in any other logical channels or it can be the data source for output to the control and settings of any object To create controlling process the Logical Channel should be set in Controller mode as in Fig 7 54 Log channel Mode Controller hh Unit m sec Controller num 1 PID Controller 1 Set point channel Log ch 3 Speed Fig 7 54 Input channel configuration in Controller mode To the parameters of Logical channel in Controller mode should be 104 Name it gives the name to the logical channel Mode Controller in this parameter user selects source of data for logical channel Unit this parameter allows the user to define the unit Controller number this parameter allows the user to select a controller from the list 1 8 User must configure the selected controller in the Controllers menu overview and configuration parameters that define the controllers can be found in Chapter 7 13 CONTROLLERS Set point channel this parameter allows the user to select a logical channel with set point value see Fig 7 55 Set point channel defines input data for process control Feedback channel this parameter allow the user to select a channel with data returned from control system see Fig 7 55 Feedback channel define input data for process control User
170. description 01h The temperature measured with a resolution given to 2 decimal places 4000 8500 in the U2 code excluding decimal point for example the value of 3523 means the temperature of 35 23 C Status of the temperature contains the error code which must be interpreted as follows 00h 10h 00h measurin correctl 10h flooding the interior of the sensor 20h 40h 80h 20h damage temperature sensor 40h measured temperature is lower 40 C 80h measured temperature is upper 85 Specify the decimal point as a result the value of 2 means that a point precedes the last 2 digits the value of 0 means no decimal point Tab 7 9 Description of the registers of SLAVE device In first step touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Modbus menu using the arrows in upper right corner choose Port number 1 MB1 in accordance with Fig 7 128 Mode parameter set as MASTER Baud rate parameter set as 9600 bits sec it should be the same as in the SLAVE device Format parameter set as 8N1 in Request timeout parameter write 0 2 sec in Request retrials parameter write 3 press Slave devices button using the arrows in upper right corner select Slave device Modbus address in this case it is 1 e Device type parameter set as defined in Device name parameter write Temperature converter e the Device channels parameter block press the
171. device this parameter is only visible if the selected option in the Port parameter is in Modbus MASTER mode see Chapter 7 15 3 Modbus MASTER mode Using this parameter the user can select the SLAVE device from the list defined in the Modbus menu to exchange the data with it Device input this parameter depend on the mode of the port for Modbus MASTER mode see Chapter 7 15 3 using this parameter the user can select the read register of the SLAVE device from the list defined in the Modbus menu for Modbus SLAVE mode see Chapter 7 15 2 next to Device input label is the logical channel number and register number assigned to this logical channel are displayed Latch parameter block allows user to set the latch function which will hold the last value of a channel discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Processing parameter block is used for scaling and filtering data discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Displaying parameter block these parameters allow the user to select the format and range of data displayed on the screen discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Select one option Slot D ACM module cee ND s EXPO UG i e _ MASTER MB2 SLAVE 13 Q SLAVE 2 TU I device MB3 MB OFF Port MB3 1s C SLAVE
172. dules installed in the device List of installed built in input modules slot tag and type of module is in the Device information menu in Hardware configuration block see Fig 7 25 In the device there are two ways to configure the hardware input using the Configure source button in the Logical channels menu in Hardware input mode e directly using the Built in inputs menu The Built in inputs can be in the same order as list in the device see Fig 7 25 a installed input modules in the appropriate slots A B or C see Fig 4 8 the list of currently available modules is on the website b built in digital input is always designated as Inp X2 Digital 24V see Chapter 7 9 3 Built in inputs Binary input Inp X2 Digital 24V C built in Demo inputs numbered X3 X4 X5 see Chapter 7 9 4 Built in inputs Demo input numbered X3 X4 X5 Built in inputs Select one option Slot A Input 1 D Igi A1 Current LA see Fig 4 8 Inp A2 Current 116 Module C Inp A15 Current e L pem inputs Slot X built in slot TPAT Current 2 rm Input 4 Inp X2 Digital 24V 1 y J Input Inp X3 Demo Built in D uilt in Demo n x4 emo ie input Inp X5 Demo Tee Fig 7 75 The view of a sample list of available built in inputs for a device 135 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 9 2 Built in inputs Input modules Short de
173. e Screen saver parameter block 1min 5min 10min 30min Brightness this parameter is hidden for Mode disabled in the other modes 1min 5min 10min 30min this parameter is visible the user can change the brightness level of the LCD screen after time set in parameter Mode elapses The options are 0 screen blank 20 40 60 63 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 64 Initial view parameter block allows the user to set the initial display screen on the LCD screen when the device is turned on this block includes two parameters Display mode select the presentation of data in the displayed group see parameter Displayed group For possible modes see Chapter 6 3 3 Data panels and Chapter 7 14 GROUPS Displayed group selects a group displayed at startup If Display mode is chosen as many groups parameter Displayed group selects the first of five following groups displayed on the screen many group mode presents 5 groups in one window For example when the user sets Display group as Group 8 then the unit will display starting from the left side of Group 8 gt Group 9 gt Group 10 gt Group 1 gt Group 2 Automatic view change parameter block this parameter block allows the user to set the display to change every time period The parameters of this block include Change mode this parameter has the following options disabled no changes in the display For this mode the remainin
174. e appears but with maintaining hardware output limitation 3 22mA Alarm state is when source logical channel returns Err or the state of exceeding range the low Lo state and high Hi state Lower level and Upper level parameter describe the transfer equation linear see Fig 7 89 Lower level of the output defines the current which can be generated when the value of the input signal is equal to the Lower level Upper level of the output defines the current which can be generated when the value of the input signal is equal to the Upper level Upper level a o o o o o o o e Output levels H _ Lower level Output value Input value Lower level lt Input levels Upper level Fig 89 Input red output blue characteristic of signal in Current output module Output Output Name Out B1 Current Upper level 20 mA Unit mA Output levels Source Log ch 1 Inp A1 Lower level 4 mA Upper level 20 mA Input levels Alarm level 4 mA Fig 7 90 Parameters of the Passive current output 156 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 10 5 Examples of build in output configurations Example 7 10 5 1 Application of the output for R45 R81 modules see Appendix 8 13 R45 R81 R65 R121 RELAY MODULES Task Let s say that we would like to control temperature around 30 C in some room by switching ON and OFF an electric heater The hysteresis should be 5 C Th
175. e device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays mA V C Q or mV depending on Mode parameter settings Mode allows to set input type used to measurements Low limit defines measurement level bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state Wire compensation menu which allows to compensate measurement errors which can be caused by wrong sensor readings Compensation mode allows to choose parameter which will be used in compensation process disable compensation is not active manual allows to compensate sensor constant offset Compensation parameter which allows tu manually compensate sensor error written here value will be added or subtracted from measured sensor value automatic allows to compensate the difference between real temperature and that measured by the sensor Actual temperature parameter in which user enters actual temperature near the sensor which is measured by more reliable thermometer Compensate button which activates the compensation value which is written in Actual temperature parameter will be from now on used for compensation Compensation read only parameter displays voltage value calculated to compensate temperature measurement User should remember that after c
176. e device will also keep new configuration in memory and user can determine are those changes gave the desired effect see Fig 7 32 This operation can be repeated any number of times as long as new configuration is saved or the old one is reverted In case of power failure changing to remote or local display any unsaved settings will be lost and the last saved configuration will be restored 56 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER CONFIGURATION Chapter 7 7 Gmwastng 7 8 gt Chapter 7 9 ox Bultininputs Chapter 7 10 Bultmoupus Chapter 7 11 External outputs Chapter 7 12 gt Chapter 7 13 gt Comes Chapter 7 14 gt Chapter 7 15 gt Modbus Chapter 7 16 gt Network settings Chapter 7 17 gt Accessoptions Fig 7 29 Main menu selection panel Configuration changes Save changes Revert changes Fig 7 30 Save revert changes window 27 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 55 Configuration changes Configuration not savedl In case of power failure you will lose any unsaved settingsl Do you want to save the configuration Fig 7 31 Warning message about unsaved configuration G01 Temperature TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Fig 7 32 Example of unsaved configuration screen view User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER
177. e list The parameters of Groups are Group each group can be e disabled after selecting this option the other parameters are not visible and this group is not visible on the measuring screen enabled for this option the group is active Name it gives the name to the Group Charts sets the chart type whet group is displayed in this mode e horizontal time axis is in horizontal position e vertical time axis is in vertical position e phasor vector signal representation each phasor is drawn based on two logical channels set in one of three Amplitude and phase blocks The logical channel which is set in Slot 1 3 5 parameter is responsible for phasor amplitude value and the logical channel which is set in Slot 2 4 6 is responsible for phasor phase value User should remember that Graph low and Graph high parameters should be adjusted to values that may occur in the logical channel because minimal and maximal phasor value corresponds to values in these parameters Phase of the phasor is module 360 function of the logical channel 190 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 2009 05 31 04 Group 4 17 40 42 05 Group 5 2009 05 31 0 30 dity 1 17 51 55 17 40 20 17 40 25 17 40 30 17 40 35 17 40 55 278 81 Meas phase 120 240 150 180 210 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS 180 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION
178. e range of the input value see below in this Chapter another method to change the source configuration is to use the Built in inputs menu see Chapter 7 9 BUILT IN INPUTS Latch parameter block allows user to set the latch function which will hold the last value of a channel discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Processing parameter block is used for scaling and filtering data discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Displaying parameter block these parameters allow the user to select the format and range of the data displayed on the screen discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Source parameter in Hardware input mode After pressing the Source button a list of available hardware inputs appears The selected option will be the source of the data for this logical channel A sample list of available hardware inputs for a device with only one input module 116 16 current inputs see Appendix 8 2 Ul4 Ul8 UI12 U16 U24 116 124 VOLTAGE and CURRENT MEASUREMENT MODULES is shown in Fig 7 42 83 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Source Select one option Slot A Input 1 OI A1 Current P see Fig 4 8 C Inp A2 Current 16 Module C 1 15 Current 7 16 current inputs Slope 560 Inp A16 Current uilt in slo E I Input 4 Inp X2 Digital 24V Built in binary
179. e temperature is measured using a PT100 sensor and RT4 input module and let the heater is controlled using an internal 5A relay R45 module Solution First configure the device as described below then connect the object and power supply as shown on Fig 7 91 See also Appendix 8 7 RT4 RT6 RTD MEASUREMENT MODULES Heater eic cun N Power supply RT4 4 RTD inputs Y 5 o OUT 1 Power supply depending on version not i y zO gt e lt 2 5 5 gt no nos nn y m2 SERVICE R45 GND 4 24v DC 5 200 5 sm D isolated Fig 7 91 Schematic diagram for the RTD input and Relay output modules To control temperature in object shown on Fig 7 91 it is necessary to configure one Logical channel and Relay output For reading PT100 sensor temperature touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Logical channels menu using the arrows the top navigation bar select any Logical channel such as 1 in Name parameter write Feedback Mode parameter set as Hardware input Source parameter set as Inp A1 RTD see Fig 7 91 enter Configure source submenu e Mode parameter set as Pt100 159 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA R
180. ed template can be used to configure the device to a different address User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER e using arrows in the upper right corner of the screen go to the Modbus address 8 press the Load device template button and in the template list select the template named Temperature converter in such a fast way to have set all the parameters for the SLAVE device 2 identical to SLAVE device 1 e exit from the SLAVE devices menu Example of Logical channel in Modbus mode is shown in Example 7 8 11 5 Example 7 15 4 2 Configuration of the Modbus Input in the MASTER mode Task The task is to configure Slave device eg Flowmeter output channel The Slave device address is 5 we write data to register 1 2 4 and 8 For communication in this task we use ACM module see Appendix 8 15 COMMUNICATION MODULES in which the port MB2 is used Solution First we need to configure the device according to the following recommendations then connect the device according to Fig 7 129 Slot D ACM Module Port MB2 4 oo Modbus settings Baud rate 19200 bit sek Slave address 5 Power supply Registers depending on version 15 Register 1h Register 2h Register 4h SERVICE Register 8h USB host 3 4 24v DC 5 max 200m4 digital input I Ei 0 15 24V DC 6 L l x 8 jas Fig 7 129 Connection diagram for the Modbus port 2
181. el mode parameter set as value o in Level parameter write 0 o in Hysteresis parameter write 0 for Timing block parameters o in ON delay parameter write 0 sec in OFF delay parameter write 10 sec Min ON time parameter write 10 sec in Min OFF time parameter write 10 sec this will be protection from fast switching on and off the valve using the arrows in the top navigation bar select Ext out 3 it is relay output there are three constant parameters which are consistent Modbus menu configuration 169 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER e Comm port MB2 MASTER e Device Addr 5 Flowmeter e Output channel Out 3 HR 8h b 0 for next parameters e parameter set as above level e Source parameter set as logical channel named Alarm state Alarm state parameter set as immed ON e for Levels block parameters Level mode parameter set as value in Level parameter write 0 in Hysteresis parameter write 0 all other parameters should be on default settings In the next step you need to define Group of configured logical channels to display them in one window on the device screen To do this touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Groups menu in Name parameter write Flowmeter for Channels block parameters e Slot 1 parameter set as logical channel 1 named Set point value e Slot 2 parameter set as logical chan
182. en moving vertical markers on the screen repeated on screen until new samples after turning on the device occurs when time when the device was off does fits between moving vertical markers on the screen When Time scale is set as less then 30 min the device has possibility to display only samples which were measured from moment when the device was turned on to present moment but they must fits in the Scale see Fig 7 117 time window M Lr M Fig 7 115 Example of displayed real signal User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Beginning of the The device is off 3 Present moment time window lt q ma Fig 7 116 Example of displayed signal when Time sample 30min Beginning of the The device is off Present moment time window gt Fig 7 117 Example of displayed signal when Time sample lt 30min Background this parameter has option e white the background of window displaying the chars is white e black the background of window displaying the chars is black Channels parameter block this block defines the number and location of Logical channels that are displayed in the Group includes the parameters e Slot 1 6 in each slot user can select a option see Fig 7 118 Fig 7 120 disabled disabled position is skipped which reduces the number of position to deploy in the display window emp
183. er that if Hardware input is displayed in more than one logical the same changes in all the others 85 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 8 3 Logical Channels Hardware output monitor mode disabled Hardware input Mode MENU gt Device configuration wp Logical channel Hardware output monitor Modbus Set point value Math function Controller Profile timer Profile timer cycle counter Data from other channel This mode allows the user to display data from built in output modules processed in any other logical channels e g by mathematical function or virtual relay or it can be the data source for controlling another output A view of the configuration of a Logical channel in Hardware output monitor mode is shown in Fig 7 44 The parameters of a Logical channel in Hardware output monitor mode are 96 it gives the name to the logical channel Unit for Built in modules it will automatically default to the unit of the module To change the unit use the Scaling parameter in Processing parameter block Mode Hardware output monitor in this parameter user selects the source of data for logical channel Source in this parameter user selects the source of data from the available built in outputs list for the logical channel see below in this Chapter Latch parameter block allows the user to set the latch function which will hold the la
184. er to which the command refers to starting with the register which is defined by REG max 32 BYTEC Number of higher bytes in the frame DATA H L Higher and lower part of data word CRC L H Higher and lower part of CRC sum 1 Read of ID code ADDR FUNC REG H L COUNT H L CRC L H 01 03 00 21 00 01 D4 00 The answer ADDR FUNC BYTEC DATA H L CRC L H 01 03 02 20 60 A1 AC DATA H L identification code 2060h 2 Read of the registers 401h 402h and 403h in one message example of reading a number of registries in one frame ADDR FUNC REG H L COUNT H L CRC L H 01 03 04 01 00 03 55 3B COUNT L the count of being read registers max 32 206 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER The answer ADDR FUNC BYTEC DATA H1 L1 DATAH2 L2 DATA H3 L3 CRC L H 01 03 06 00 OA 00 02 00 00 18 B4 DATAH1 L1 4011 registry 10 high word of value for channel 1 no decimal point DATAH2 L2 402h registry 2 low word of value for channel 1 no decimal point DATA L3 403h registry 0 status for channel 1 1 There is no full implementation of the Modbus Protocol the device The functions presented above are the only available 7 15 3 Modbus MASTER mode The parameters of a Modbus protocol for MASTER mode are Mode MASTER Baud rate this parameter allows the user to select baud rate RS 485 interface available option 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 b
185. er Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER User should pay attention for a fact that some mathematical functions have limitations Those limitations are listed bellow Function X Y e f Y equals 0 then logical channel will be in Err state in other way Y zz 0 gt ERROR Function arcsin X e f absolute value of X is greater than 1 then logical channel will be in Err state in other way abs X gt 1 0 gt ERROR Function arccos X e f absolute value of X will be greater than 1 then logical channel will be in Err state in other way abs X 1 0 ERROR Function tan X e f absolute value of X in radians minus k multiplied by rr is lower than one hundred millionth then logical channel will be in Err state in other Way abs X rad k rr lt 1 0e 8 keN ERROR Function arctan X f absolute value of X in radians is lower than one hundred millionth then the function result will be 0 in other way abs X rad lt 1e 8 arctan X 0 f absolute value of X in radians is greater than one hundred millions then the function result will be Tr divided by 2 multiplied by sign of X in other way abs X rad gt 1e8 gt arctan X PI 2 sign X Function cot X e f absolute value of X in radians minus k multiplied by rr is lower than one hundred millionth then logical channel will be in Err state in other way abs X rad lt 1 0 8 ERROR Funct
186. er write 5 sec Unit parameter set as second Shape parameter set as ramp Final value parameter write 10 press the green plus at the bottom left side of the screen to configure Section num 2 o in Duration parameter write 2 sec o Unit parameter set as second Shape parameter set as conts value o in Final value parameter write 8 press the green plus at the bottom left side of the screen to configure Section num 3 o in Duration parameter write 3 sec o Unit parameter set as second Shape parameter set as ramp Final value parameter write 4 press the green plus at the bottom left side of the screen to configure Section num 4 o in Duration parameter write 1 sec o Unit parameter set as second Shape parameter set as const value Final value parameter write 4 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Looping parameter set as disabled because we want that Profile will be executed only once after triggering from logical channel 2 atthe end leave the Profiles timers menu In the next step you need to define a Logical channel touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Logical channel such as 1 in Name parameter write Profile Mode parameter set as P T1 Profile 1 for Displaying block parameters Format para
187. erties Xming in cooperation with the MulitCon device allows to change the following parameters selected below xming exe 0 ac clipboard screen 0 320 240 100 200 Screen number 0 9 Shift the screen by 100 pixels to the right and 200 pixels down Fig 7 26 Xming parameters description Screen number in Xming should be set the same as the value of the Screen number parameter in Network settings submenu in MultiCon device see below the point 5 4 Next close the window properties and run Xming using desktop icon 5 n Network settings of the device in the group Remote Display enter the IP address of your computer and Screen number 0 then exit menu and save configuration changes 6 In the Device information menu press the Remote display button and confirm switching to remote display After a while the device screen will be redirected to your computer screen 54 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER To establish connection between the device and PC port number 6000 must be unlocked The Export manual button allows you to download the user manual on to the flash drive The Service options button see Fig 7 27 allows the user to delete current configuration and restore default settings excepting Access options see Chapter 7 17 It is done by passing the password which is RENEW CONFIGURATION Device information Logging active ys 1 Enter licence key Firmware upda
188. es informations about files with log samples Due to security of data samples are stored in a separate files which changes from time to time File log db log files contains an information about such files Every line describes other file 1 ID unique identifier of the file 2 file start date 3 file end date or NULL if file is not finished Fig 8 35 log db log files file view example Files with samples partX db These files contains a logged samples Names of these files are created according to a rule partX db SUFFIX where X unique identifier of a file see log db log files SUFFIX can be raster samples timestamp If file has suffix raster the it contains info about time period between samples 1 IDR hexadecimal id of the sample for which raster becomes valid 2 period floating point number which expresses period in seconds 1 2 OOOOFAIE 1 0000009 0000FC1E gt 1 0000009 Fig 8 36 partX db raster file view example If file has suffix timestamp then it contains info about samples synchronisation 1 IDT hexadecimal id of the sample for which synchronisation data is stored 2 T date timestamp 213 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 1 e eee 0000 2010 08 04 10 25 43 4219 0000F9F8 2010 08 04 10 25 94 4179 0000F39F1 2010 08 04 10 26 03 4209 0000FSFB gt 2010 08 04 10 26 13 4209 2010 08 04 10 26 24 4209
189. eter set Register type parameter set as HOLDING in Register number parameter write 2h Data format parameter set as 16 bits unsigned in Data shift parameter write 0 in Data mask parameter write 0x0080 o in the HI value parameter for the signal HI set the value of 0x0080 LO state parameter set as if register value in the LO register parameter set Register type parameter set as HOLDING in Register number parameter write 2h Data format parameter set as 16 bits unsigned in Data shift parameter write 0 in Data mask parameter write 0x0040 o in the HI value parameter for the signal Hl set the value of 0x0040 ERR state parameter set as if register 7 value in the ERR register parameter set Register type parameter set as HOLDING in Register number parameter write 2h Data format parameter set as 16 bits unsigned in Data shift parameter write 0 Data mask parameter write 0x00CO o in the HI value parameter for the signal set the value of 0x0000 Blocks configuration mode parameter set as automatic Max block size parameter set as 5 because the slave device selected in this example allows reading frame using the Modbus function O3h with up to 5 registers move to the Device templates parameter block and press Save device template button in the Save device template menu enter the template name eg Temperature converter stor
190. eter write 22 All other parameters should be set as default 78 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Logical channel 2 Overhead alarm threshold n Name parameter write Overhead alarm threshold Mode parameter set as Set point value Edit button parameter set as enabled n Unit parameter write mA Precision parameter set as 0 00 n Graph low parameter write 0 In Graph high parameter write 22 other parameters should be set as default Logical channel 3 Bottom alarm threshold n Name parameter write Bottom alarm threshold Mode parameter set as Set point value A Edit button parameter set on enabled n Unit parameter write mA Precision parameter set as 0 00 n Graph low parameter write 0 n Graph high parameter write 22 All other parameters should be set as default Logical channel 4 Alarm displaying n Name parameter write Alarm state Mode parameter set as Hardware output monitor Source parameter set as Out V1 Virtual relay Format parameter set as binary n Off state text parameter write No alarm n On state text parameter write ALARM In Graph low parameter write 0 In Graph high parameter write 22 Now we go to Channel highlight submenu e Highlight color parameter set as 1 Mode parameter set as blinking In Blink period parameter write 1 e InTrig hold time parameter wr
191. evice Triggering source Logical channel or 3 Profile timer selected time Logical channel in Profile timer mode Generated Profil timer Fig 7 97 Block diagram of the device configuration for generating Profiles timers 171 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER The window with basic parameters of the Profile timer shown on Fig 7 98 Profile timer Name Profile 1 4 Triggering mode level gate Triggering source Log ch 2 Channel 2 Idle value 1 Section list Fig 7 98 View of the configuration Profiles timers window Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allow you to switch els el between Profile timer The middle button allows you to directly select a specific Profile timer from the list Common parameters for Profile timer are Name it gives the name to the Profile timer Triggering mode using this parameter user select a way to generated Profile timer there are five modes of triggering 172 disabled level gate this means that Profile which was configured by user will be generated when source signal will have a value gt 0 otherwise if source value lt 0 defined Profile will not be generated For more details see Chapter 7 12 2 Profiles timers Triggering mode level gate edge once edge retrig edge once this means that which was configured by user Profile will be t
192. f the data in the displayed group see parameter Displayed group For possible modes see Chapter 6 3 3 Data panels and Chapter 7 14 GROUPS Displayed group allows the user to select a group displayed at startup If the Display mode is chosen as many groups parameter Display group selects the first of five following groups displayed on the screen mode many group presents 5 groups in one window For example when setting the parameter to Display group Group 8 then the display will show starting from the left side of Group 8 gt Group 9 gt Group 10 gt Group 1 gt Group 2 Display time this parameter is visible for the Triggering mode by time it sets the duration in seconds of the selected view Adda new view button adds a new view to the list Delete this view button deletes selected view from the list Move to position this parameter allows the user to move the current view to the appropriate position Example Steps to create four views are as follows 1 Inthe Change mode parameter select detailed list 2 Press the Setup list button and enter the View menu 3 Setparameters for a first View Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allow you to o lt c move to the next view The middle button allows direct selection of a particular view 4 To add or delete further views use the Add a new view button or Delete this view button respectively 5 When the user wants
193. f units 98 mm p aa Y N Annn NS NNN 2 removable terminals Fig 4 4 Installing of brackets 13 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER To avoid connectors slots destruction use the method shown on Fig 4 5 GOOD back side of device ooooooooooooQQQ connector gt r r r r r back side of device connector Fig 4 5 Connectors removing method 4 3 CONNECTION METHOD Caution A Installation should be conducted by qualified personnel During installation all available safety requirements should be considered The fitter is responsible for executing the installation according to this manual local safety and EMC regulations The unit is not equipped with an internal fuse or power supply circuit breaker Because of this an external time delay cut out fuse with a small nominal current value must be used recommended bipolar max 2A and a power supply circuit breaker located near the unit Fig 4 6 In the case of using a monopolar fuse it must be mounted on the active wire L The power supply network cable diameter must be selected in such a way that in the case of a short circuit of the cable from the side of the unit the cable shall be
194. file with an accuracy of seconds In every parameter the user can select any number of options If none option is selected in any parameter after accepting next to that parameter Press to select description appears Additionally in that case the Profile will not be generated In Fig 7 103 and Fig 7 104 shown examples of Profile timer triggering times configuration and output waveform Operation of Profile in on time mode is similar to edge once mode see Chapter 7 12 2 Profiles timers Triggering mode level gate edge once edge retrig because after the rising edge of the triggering source the Profile will be generated in whole regardless of further changes of the signal source at time generating the Profile 176 Triggering times Months June a Days 04 Week days Thursday Hours 14 Minutes 42 Seconds 00 Respectively 0 sec 20 sec 30 sec 50 sec Fig 7 103 Samples of time settings for Profile timer User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Idle value gt D G U 0 O O 5 2 lt 3 2 5 po SF ON SF ON gt gt gt 5 5 5 5 v EAT gt lt Fig 7 104 Waveform for on time triggering mode and time parameters accordance with Fig 7 103 7 12 4 Examples of Profile timer configurations Example 7 12 4 1 Application of the Profiles timers Task The task is to create a
195. g 1 MB1 Addr 1 Out 2 binary Device Addr 1 SCK 10 Output channel Out 1 HR 1 1 1 C MB1 Addr 2 Out 1 analog MB1 Addr 2 Out 2 binary Addr 3 Out 1 analog Addr 3 Out 2 binary Source Log ch 1 Channel 1 C Output channel Out 1 HR 12h 1 b 0 31 Source Log ch 1 Channel 1 Fig 7 93 View of External outputs menu for as a linear output type control Input levels Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen let you switch between a succession of external outputs The middle button allows direct selection of a specific external output from the list The parameters that are common for the External outputs see Fig 7 92 and Fig 7 93 are Communication port this parameter is read only in External outputs menu and indicates the Modbus port number a description of Modbus ports configuration and view of the Modbus port connectors is located in Chapter 7 15 MODBUS Device this parameter is read only in External outputs menu it shows address and name of the SLAVE device configured in Modbus menu Chapter 7 15 3 Modbus MASTER mode Output channel this parameter is read only in External outputs menu it shows output channel number type of register and data format configured in Modbus menu each SLAVE device defined in a specific address has its individually numbered output list Source this parameter allows to choose a source for
196. g parameters in this block are not visible change modes allows the user to automatically change the displayed mode change groups allows the user to automatically change displayed group A detailed list allows to automatically change displayed views defined by the user Triggering mode this parameter has the following options by time it enables to change displayed view at fixed time intervals from log channel changes displayed view depending on value in selected logical channel If value in this channel is less than 1 displayed view number is 1 if value in this parameter equal or more than 1 but less than 2 displayed view number is 2 and so on The last defined view does not has the upper limit Display time this parameter is visible for the Change mode change modes change groups duration set in seconds for each screen Triggering source this parameter is visible for the Change mode change modes change groups and for the Triggering mode from log channel it allows the user to choose logical channel from the list which value will sets up the displaying view Change timeout this parameter determines the time from the device startup or manually change of the view to first automatic view change Setup list this button is visible for Change mode parameter setted as detailed list this parameter is described below in this Chapter Remote shutdown parameter block allow
197. gnals voltage levels logical LOW state logical HIGH state Uin lt 1V Uin gt 4V Uin lt 1V Uin gt 4V Uin 1V Uin gt 4V 251 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER D8 D16 D24 Max input voltage 30V 30V 30V Input current consumption about 15mA 24V about 5mA 10V about 2mA 5V about 15mA 24V about 5mA 10V about 2mA 5V about 15mA 24V about 5mA 10V about 2mA 35V Input signals representation 8 single bits IN1 IN8 two 4 bit groups IN9 IN 10 1 byte IN11 16 single bits IN1 IN16 four 4 bit groups IN17 IN20 1 integer IN21 24 single bits IN1 IN24 six 4 bit groups IN25 IN 30 1 integer IN31 Sampling frequency 3kHz 3kHz 3kHz Isolation strength 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC Weight 30g 40g 58g Tab 8 18 Technical data for the module D8 D16 D24 Isolation R 3k IN 1 o R 3k IN 2 o K R 3k IN 3 0 R 3k IN 4 o 114 Interface COM 1 40 IN 5 o IN 6 o IN 7 o IN 8 o 5 8 lt p
198. ground e in Graph low write 0 e in Graph high write 1 In the next step you need to define Group the set up logical channels to view them in one window on the screen To do this enter the Group menu to enable the Group 1 if it is off in Name parameter write Monitor output for Channels block parameters Slot 1 parameter set as Logical channel 5 called Relay 1 e other parameters in this block Slot 2 6 set as disabled because we want to show only one logical channel The last step is to define the Initial view displayed on the LCD screen when the device starts Initial View has to display a defined Group 1 in values mode To do this enter General settings menu for Initial view block parameters e Display mode parameter set as value Displayed group parameter set as Group 1 Output monitor After whole configuration exit the menu pressing Save changes the result will be visible as soon as first measurement is done View the window of MultiCon with the above configuration is shown in Fig 7 68 G 01 Output monitor G 01 Output monitor o7 Relay 1 Relay 1 Fig 7 68 The proposition of the result of the Example 4 123 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example 7 8 11 5 Application of Logical channel in the Modbus mode see Chapter 7 15 MODBUS Task The task is to read the temperature of the two SLAVE devices from the register 1 which is assigned a physical address
199. h functions constant value which will be initial value for the function after its reset or device start Max value mode available for some math functions depending on this parameter the user can set following options channel means that maximal value will be determined by selected logical channel value means that maximal value will be a constant value entered in the Maximal value parameter Max value source available for certain math functions selects logical channel from list which will be maximal value source for the function 95 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 96 Maximal value available for certain math functions constant value which will be maximal value for the function Averaging time available for Function avarege of X determines logical channel amount of samples which fits in this time and will be averaged after this time function enters a saturated state Reset now button available for certain math functions asynchronously resets function value Reset mode available for some math functions depending on this parameter the user can set following options e disabled means that function after reaching maximal value will stop on this value automatic means that function after reaching maximal value will axiomatically resets it self and returns to initial value from log channel means that function reset is triggered from selected logical
200. h the data source for built in output returns Err state or the state of the exceeding range low Lo state and high Hi state There are following options in this parameter no change means that at the time of an alarm state there is no change in the output immediate OFF means that in times of alarm state the device immediately switches the output to low state immediate ON means that in times of alarm state the device immediately switches the output to high state e timed OFF means that in times of alarm state the device switches the output to low state after time delay set in Timing parameter block e timed ON means that in times of alarm state the device switches the output to low state after time delay set in Timing parameter block e for PWM mode in SSR relay module instead of Alarm state parameter is Alarm level parameter which allows the user to enter value at the output in times of alarm state for more information see Chapter 7 10 3 Build in output PWM Pulse width modulation mode for SSR relay output Levels block parameter these parameters allows the user to set range of changes of the output depending on the input signal is discussed below in this Chapter Timing parameter block these parameters allows the user to set delay time change the output state and minimum duration of the output state is discussed below in this Chapter 151 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER For Built in
201. hanging the sensor new settings in Wire compensation menu should be made 144 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Connectors temperature input parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays measurement unit C Mode parameter which displays Temp of connectors Low limit defines measurement level bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state Offset parameter which allows to add or subtract constant value to temperature measured by connectors temperature sensor 7 9 5 9 Optoisolated digital inputs modules D modules are equipped with eight sixteen or twenty four digital inputs see Appendix 8 9 D8 D16 D24 OPTOISOLATED DIGITAL INPUTS MODULE This inputs can be used individually but also in groups of four or all inputs available in module Measurement results are presented in decimal system D modules parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Filter time defines minimal time that has to elapse from last input state change if this change wants to be noticed Each input has the possibility to sets its o
202. he device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays C or depending on Mode parameter settings Mode defines which sensor is used for measurement or what is the resistance measurement range and what is the method of these measurements three wired method is assigned to separated option in Mode parameter e g Pt100 3 wire while two and four wired method is assigned to different option in Mode parameter e g Pt100 143 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Low limit defines measurement level bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state for each sensor this limitation is different but it can be changed in certain limits High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state for each sensor this limitation is different but it can be changed in certain limits 7 9 5 8 Isolated universal inputs modules UN modules are equipped in three or five universal inputs and one input for connectors temperature measurement see Appendix 8 8 UN3 UN5 OPTOISOLATED UNIVERSAL INPUTS MODULES It is most advanced available module With its help user can make many different kind of measurements in each channel This module can measure voltage current resistance temperature using resistance sensors or thermocouples UN modules parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by th
203. he user can also view the assignment of groups of registers to logical channels as well as other important parameters of devices The list of parameters of SLAVE settings menu Load device template this button allows the loading of a template with predefined blocks of input registers for more information see Chapter 7 15 2 1 Modbus SLAVE Modbus Templates for SLAVE mode Save device template this button allows saving of templates of predefined blocks of input registers for more information see Chapter 7 15 2 1 Modbus SLAVE Modbus Templates for SLAVE mode Device channels parameters block this block of parameters allows the user to define type data format and activity registers the user can also preview the list of registers to read and blocks of registers to transmit into modbus frames 7 15 2 1 Modbus SLAVE Modbus Templates for SLAVE mode In the SLAVE settings menu there are 2 buttons for modbus templates Load device template this button allows for loading a template with predefined blocks of output registers Pressing this button invokes a file selection window Templates can be imported into the MultiCon using a File Management menu Save device template this button allows the user to save in templates the predefined blocks of input registers Saved template can be used for fast copying moving of the SLAVE device settings to another port using Load device template button easy exchange of
204. here a deeper analysis is required for example in critical state of object this parameter has the following options e disabled alternative logging of selection Group is disabled e from logical channel this option activate new parameter Triggering source which enabled logging the data when the value of Triggering source gt 0 e Alternative source this parameter is visible for Mode from log channel when value of this source gt 0 than the data logging for alternative mode is enabled Alternative period and Alternative unit this parameters set duration of the sample of data logging for alternative mode these parameters have options unit second gt duration form 0 1 to 3600 sec e unit minute gt duration form 0 1 to 1440 minute e unit hour gt duration form 0 1 to 24 hour For any changes to the settings of the configuration of logging Group e g a change in the logging parameters changing parameters of Display options parameter block or change parameters of Logical channel included in logging Group creates a new logging file If user shuts down the device or changes other parameters independent of logging Group new logging file is not created On time of saving reverting configuration or loading configuration from pendrive the logging is hold what will cause absence of samples in logging files Accurate description of data structure which are saved during logging is in chapter 8 16 DATA FORMAT Use
205. hich can be only SLAVE mode MASTER SLAVE device 5101 D module _ MASTER SLAVE device D _ MASTER SLAVE device Power supply depending on version SERVICE TR digital input s 0 15 24V DC MASTER device Fig 7 124 Serial communication ports available in the device 199 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 15 1 Modbus General settings Window with basic parameters of communication interfaces is shown in Fig 7 125 Mode SLAVE Baud rate 115200 bits sec Format 8N1 Address 1 SLAVE settings Fig 7 125 Configuration parameters for SLAVE mode Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allow switching between available serial ports The middle button can be used for direct selection of a specific communication port from the list Parameter common for all Modbus protocol modes is Mode which has option e disabled the selected Modbus port is inactive e SLAVE this device is SLAVE device see Chapter 7 15 2Modbus SLAVE mode e MASTER this device is MASTER device and manages the Slave devices see Chapter 7 15 3 Modbus MASTER mode 7 15 2 Modbus SLAVE mode The parameters of the Modbus RTU protocol serial communication for SLAVE mode are Mode SLAVE Baudrate determines the baud rate of the RS 485 interface available
206. iate measures assuring correct operation of the unit must be applied To avoid the unit of improper indications keep recommendations listed below N N Depending on version E 85 230 260V AC DC or L USE 19 24 50V DC 16 24 35V AC Fig 4 6 Connection of power supply e Avoid running signal cables and transmission cables together with power supply cables and cables controlling inductive loads e g contactors Such cables should cross at a right angle Contactor coils and inductive loads should be equipped with interference protection systems e g RC type Use of screened signal cables is recommended Signal cable screens should be connected to the earthing only at one of the ends of the screened cable e n the case of magnetically induced interference the use of twisted pair signal cables is recommended Twisted pair best if shielded must be used with RS 485 serial transmission connections n the case of measurement or control signals are longer than 30m or go outside of the building then additional safety circuits are required e n the case of interference from the power supply side the use of appropriate interference filters is recommended Bear in mind that the connection between the filter and the unit should be as short as possible and the metal housing of the filter must be connected to the earth with the largest possible surface The cables connected to the filter output must not be run with cables w
207. ich have to appear when alarm state appears It occurs when the logical channel which is source for the external output returns Err Hi or Lo value User should remember that the relationship between input and output levels are described by linear transmission equation and it is limited by the range see Fig 7 95 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Upper level Output levels Lower level Output value Input value Lower level lt Input levels Upper level Fig 7 95 The relation between the input and output for External output Note If external output is active see the parameter Output active yes the Chapter 7 15 3 2 Modbus MASTER Device channels parameter block for undefined Source parameter e g a Logical channel in the Mode disabled or for undefined Input and Output levels parameter block every parameter has value O the CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER send to Slave device value 0 167 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 11 4 Examples of external output configurations During the External output configuration user should terminate communication between the MultiCon and the SLAVE device Example 7 11 4 1 Application of external output for protocol Modbus in the MASTER mode Task The task is to send data located in Logical channel 1 to SLAVE device address 5 without scaling and restrictions Slot D ACM Module Slave device 1 Device name Fl
208. ilable for certain math functions Available types are e channel means that the X source will be a logical channel selected from list in Source X parameter e value means that the X source will be a constant value entered in the Source X parameter Source X available for certain math functions Depends of Type of source X parameter This parameter allows user to select logical channel from list Type of source Y channel orenter set point value Type of source Y value X error handling available for some math functions depending on this parameter the user can set following options errors forwarded to result when the result of the selected channel Source X is a state Error Hi Lo or undefined then the output received states Err Hi or Lo Skip erroneous channels means that these channels which result in a status of Error Hi Lo are ignored in the calculation of selected math function Init value mode available for some math functions depending on this parameter the user can set following options channel means that initial value will be loaded from selected logical channel value means that initial value will be a constant value entered in the Initial value parameter nit value source available for certain math functions selects logical channel from list which will be initial value source for the function Initial value available for certain mat
209. in pause state Additionally when in Section list parameter Shape of Section num 1 is set as const value then Profile timer will set itself on Final value of this section and when in Section list parameter Shape of Section num 1 is set as slope then Profile timer will set itself on its Idle value e low level Profile timer will be paused when channel s value in Pause source parameter will be lower or equal zero lt 0 and will be resumed when this value will be greater than zero gt 0 If Profile timer is paused and new trigger will be detected the Profile timer will remain in pause state Additionally when in Section list parameter Shape of Section num 1 is set as const value then Profile timer will set itself on Final value of this section and when in Section list parameter Shape of Section num 1 is set as slope then Profile timer will set itself on its Idle value rising edge Profile timer will be paused when the device detects channel s value change from lower or equal zero lt 0 to greater than zero gt 0 in Pause source parameter and will be resumed when the device detects another change like that in this channel If Profile timer is paused and new trigger will be detected the Profile timer will react on this trigger like it would not be paused e falling edge Profile timer will be paused when the device detects channel s value change from greater than zero gt 0 to lower or equal zero lt 0
210. in the MultiCon see Chapter 7 15 MODBUS 90 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 8 5 Logical Channels Set point value mode Mode MENU wp Device configuration Logical channel Set point value disabled Hardware input Hardware output monitor Modbus Math function Controller Profile timer Profile timer cycle counter Data from other channel In Set point value mode the user defines constant value which can be displayed on the screen used for calculations in other channels e g in math functions controllers etc or as a data source for built in or external outputs which will control any object The parameters of the Logical channels in Set point value mode should be Name it gives the name to the logical channel Mode Set point value in this parameter user selects source type of data for logical channel Unit this parameter allows the user to define any unit Set point value this parameter is visible only if Edit button disabled after pressing the button next to Set point value parameter appears in window allowing entry of a value see Fig 7 6 this value will be a source of data for this Logical channel Edit button this parameter allows you to activate the button in the panel data see Fig 7 49 this parameter has two options e disabled the button is disabled on the display in this case the data source of logical channel will be the value set in the Set poin
211. input C InpJG Demo C Demo gt Built in Demo input Inp X5 Demo ik Fig 7 42 The view of a sample list of available hardware inputs for a device In the device there are two methods to change the source configuration of the 1 Built in inputs e using Configure source button in Logical channel menu in Hardware input mode e using the Built in inputs menu The Source for Hardware input mode can be in the same order as list in the device see Fig 7 42 a installed input modules in the appropriate slots A B or C see Fig 4 8 the list of currently available modules is on the website Description of input modules parameters is shown in Chapter 7 9 2 Built in inputs Input modules The following steps change the Source configuration for the sample of 3 modules shown in Fig 7 43 Step 1 selection of Source for channel in Hardware input mode for example Inp A1 Current next press the Configure source button to enter Source configuration menu A Step 2 press the Mode button to change range of the current input Step 3 choose from the list of available options for signal range for example Current 0 20mA for current module 94 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Low Limit 0 mA High Limit 20 mA Pt100 Pt100 3 wire ze Current 0 20mA Unit mA N gt C Current 4 20mA Mode Current 0 20mA Source configuration CPG
212. ion arcctg X e If absolute values of X in radians is lower than one hundred millionth then the function result will be Tr divided by 2 multiplied by sign of X in other way X lt 1e 8 arcctg X 2 sign X e f absolute value of X in radians is greater than one hundred millions then the function result will be 0 in other way abs X rad gt 1e8 arcctg X 0 102 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Function XY e f X jest is equal 0 and Y is lower than 0 then logical channel will be in Err state in other way X220 Y lt 0 gt ERROR e f X is lower than and Y is not integer then logical channel will be in Err state in other way X 0 Ye C ERROR Function log X e If Xor Y is lower than 1 40129846 10 5 then logical channel will be in Err state in other way X lt 1 40129846e 45 V lt 1 40129846e 45 gt ERROR e f absolute value of Y minus 1 is lower than 1 19209290 10 then logical channel will be in Err state in other way abs Y 1 1 19209290e 7 ERROR 103 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 8 7 Logical Channels Controller mode disabled Hardware input Hardware output monitor Modbus Set point value Math function MENU Mode mmm Device configuration Logical channel P 0077700 Profile timer Profile timer cycle counter Data from other channel This mo
213. it 12 bit 12 bit 12 bit Isolation strength 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC Weight 23g 30g 38g 53g Tab 8 23 Technical data for the module IO2 IO4 O06 and 108 265 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER IO4 4 current output PASSIVE c A Ammeter 1 PASSIVE c Power supply depending on version l SERVICE GND 24V DC 5 Imax 200 5 p digital input 0 15 24V DC 6 enD 7 Ammeter 2 PASSIVE c N soe c gt 104 4 current output PASSIVE c Ammeter 1 Power supply depending on version PASSIVE c Ammeter 2 SERVICE PASSIVE c N GND 4 24V DC 5 Imax 200mA digital input 0 15 24V DC nl c Fig 8 29 Connections for the Passive current output from Power supply side 266 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Q Out 4 20mA oe Isolation Current regulator A Vy Out 4 20mA Oi Current regulator Q Out 4 20mA Q d Current regulator Out 4 20m
214. it sec Format data format of the RS 485 interface available options are shown in the Tab 7 8 Number of data bits parity control Number of stop bits 8 none 1 none even odd odd 8 2 8 1 8 even 2 8 1 8 2 Tab 7 8 Data format of the RS 485 interface Request timeout is the amount of time any value between 0 01 to 3 sec the Master device waits for a response from the Slave device after sending a query Request retrials this is the number of times integer value between 1 to 5 a Master device tries to send a message Interval minimal amount of time that elapses between read write cycles The read write cycle contains all operations with Slave devices If the Master device requests all Slave devices in shorter time than the interval then new requests will begin after Interval elapses Slave device this Button enters submenu allows to define the list of Slave devices connected to the current serial port of MultiCon and configure registers for read and or write See below for more informations about this menu 207 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER SLAVE device menu MultiCon allows to address as many as 255 slave devices on the addresses from 1 to 255 To define external data source first an address must be chosen next further parameters of the SLAVE device having this address set Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allo
215. itch between visualisation modes groups and to enter the menu 0 Temperature _ 15 00 2011 02 0 G01 Halltemperature 2313 Pressure Pressure 0 i 46 nidity Temperature Humidity 96 C 96RH 29 1 15 00 29 1 Fig 6 3 Main window of device displaying the Navigation bar This bar contains three kinds of buttons shown in Tab 6 1 switching between visualisation modes of current group for possible modes see Chapter 6 3 3 Data panels and Chapter 7 14 GROUPS entering the main menu see details in Chapter 7 CONFIGURATION OF THE CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER GROUP 4 activation and settings for Group view see Chapter 7 14 switching between presented groups of logical channels GROUPS 35 Tab 6 1 Buttons of the navigation bar User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER To enter directly into the configuration menu of particular Logical channel press 1 and hold screen over the channel data panel for 3 4 seconds see option 1 in the Fig 6 4 entering configuration of the logical channel named Temperature Similarly to go directly to configuration of displayed Group touch and hold the group number or group name in the upper Information bar for a few seconds see option 2 in the Fig 6 4 entering configuration of the Group named Group 4 In both cases if a password is set see Chapter 7 17 ACCESS OPTIONS then the user has to enter the password before entering the
216. ite 1 Trigger parameter set as logical channel that we currently configuring in this task it will be Logical channel 4 named Alarm state Alarm state parameter set as no highlight e Now go to Color parameter and set font color at the top of screen and background color at the bottom of the screen For Highlight color 2 and 3 set Mode parameter as disabled Virtual relay V1 Defining when is time to activate the alarm Mode parameter set as outside range Source parameter set as logical channel named as Current value A Alarm state parameter set as immed ON Level mode parameter set as channel Lower level parameter set as logical channel named as Overhead alarm threshold Upper level parameter set as logical channel named as Bottom alarm threshold other parameters should be set as default 79 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example 2 Task User s task is to set blinking highlight on temperature channel which will be activated on three different levels Solution After connecting all measuring devices and configuring them in MultiCon we can start to configure the highlights To complete the task we will need to configure 7 logical channels a Channel with first level b Channel with second level c Channel with third level d Channel that will tell when will first alarm appear e Channel that will tell when will second alarm appear f Channel that will
217. ith separate supply 24 in 3 groups with separate supply Max current source per output while powered internally while powered externally 10mA sum limited to 50mA 100 sum limited to 500 10mA sum limited to 50mA for a group 100mA sum limited to 500mA for a group 10mA sum limited to 50mA for a group 100mA sum limited to 500mA for a group Output High Level voltage lout 5mA while powered internally while powered externally 28V gt Vext 0 5V 8V Vext 0 5V 2 2 gt 8V 2 Vext 0 5V Output Low Level voltage lout 5mA lt 1V lt 1V lt 1V Overload protection while powered internally while powered externally Internal fuse 50mA Internal fuse 500mA Internal fuse 50mA per group Internal fuse 500mA per group Internal fuse 50mA per group Internal fuse 500mA per group Maximum external supply of output 30V 30V Dynamic parameters set individually for every output PWM period 0 1 1600 sec 0 1 1600 sec 30V 0 1 1600 sec PWM resolution 0 1 sec 0 1 sec 0 1 sec PWM internal frequency 5kHz 5kHz 5kHz Pulse duty factor 0 100 0 100 0 100 Pulse duty factor resolution 15 bits 0x8000 means 100 15 bits 0x8000 means 100 15 bits 0x8000 means 100 Lo state minimum time limit 0 800
218. ith interference e g circuits controlling relays or contactors 15 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Connections of power supply voltage and measurement signals are executed using the screw connections on the back of the unit s housing lt a O 5 6 mm max 1 5 mm Fig 4 7 Method of cable isolation replacing and cable terminals dimensions AN All connections must be made while power supply is disconnected Slot D Slot C Slot B Slot A A Power supply depending on version 24V DC 5 Imax 200mA digital input 0 15 24V DC isolated Fig 4 8 Terminals description The basic performance of the device see Fig 4 8 contains only the extreme left terminals Power supply SERVICE Sensor supply output 24V DC Imax 200mA Digital input OV 15 24V DC low state 0 1V high state 8 24V Interface RS 485 16 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER If the UN3 or UN5 module is installed the 24V DC output is available only in devices equipped with PS42 power supply module In other cases there is no 24V DC output available and these terminals remain disconnected Depending on customer s needs the basic version of the device can be upgraded with up to three O modules installed in a place designated as Slot A Slot B Slot C advanced communication module additional serial USB and Ethernet interfaces installed in Slot D
219. ked as Out X1 Sound signal more about the Sound outputs is in Chapter 7 10 BUILT IN OUTPUTS built in Virtual relays marked as Out V1 V16 more about Virtual relay in Chapter 7 10 BUILT IN OUTPUTS Select one option Out C1 Relay Out C2 Relay Out C3 Relay ES C Out C7 Relay OUut C8 Relay Slot C Output 7 See Fig 4 8 R81 module 8 relay outputs olot X biuilt in slot Output 1 Built in Ou Sound signal Slot V built in slot C Virtual relay Sound Output 2 Qui Virtual relay Built in Out V15 Virtual relay Virtual relay Out V16 Virtual relay Fig 7 45 Sample list of available hardware outputs 97 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 8 4 Logical Channels Modbus mode MENU Device configuration gt Logical channel disabled Hardware input Hardware output monitor Mode Set point value Math function Controller Profile timer Profile timer cycle counter Date from other channel Modbus mode allows the user to configure the logical channel to read the data from a SLAVE device transmitted over RS 485 Modbus RTU MultiCon device in MASTER mode read write the data from to logical channel of MultiCon device transmitted over RS 485 Modbus RTU MultiCon device in SLAVE mode or by Ethernet port Modbus TCP IP M
220. l For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 4 2 ASSEMBLY The unit is designed for mounting inside housings control panel switchboard insuring appropriate protection against surges and interference Metal housings must be connected to ground in a way that complies with the governing regulations Disconnect the power supply prior to starting assembly Check the connections are wired correctly prior to switching the unit on In order to install the unit a mounting hole must be prepared according to Fig 4 2 The thickness of the material of which the panel is made must not exceed 5mm When preparing the mounting hole take the grooves for catches located on both sides of the housing into consideration Fig 4 2 Place the unit in the mounting hole inserting it from the front side of the panel and then fix it using the brackets Fig 4 4 The minimum distances between the centre points of multiple units due to the thermal and mechanical conditions of operation are shown on Fig 4 3 96 x 96 housinq H W 90 5 mm h 16 mm 144 x 144 housing H W 137 mm h 38 5 mm 1 mm 1 mm max 5 mm 8 gt gt Fig 4 2 Mounting hole dimensions 12 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER W p 96 x 96 housing H W 115 mm 144 x 144 housing H W 165 mm Fig 4 3 Minimum distances when assembly of a number o
221. l state value of selected logical channel e from channel negation means that flip flop K input source will be negated logical state value of selected logical channel K input source available for Function flip flop selects a logical channel which will be source for flip flop K input Clock source available for Function flip flop but unavailable if parameters J input mode and K input mode are both set as always 0 allows to select a logical channel which will be flip flop clock input source Clock triggering available for Function flip flop the user can set following options e high level flip flop triggers when in selected in Clock source parameter channel is in high logical state low level flip flop triggers when in selected in Clock source parameter channel is in low logical state User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER rising edge flip flop triggers when in selected in Clock source parameter channel rising edge occurs e falling edge flip flop triggers when in selected in Clock source parameter channel falling edge occurs Rinput mode available for Function flip flop the user can set following options disabled resetting flip flop R input in inactive e from log channel means that flip flop R input source will be logical state of the selected logical channel e from channel negation means that flip flop R input source will be negated logical state of the selected
222. lank page reserved for future use 4 event log returns recorded events currently returns blank page reserved for future use Example of query viewing information about all logs http 192 168 1 176 cgi bin data cgi cmd main_log amp file logs 279 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Obtaining specified log informations cmd log To obtain specified log information a log parameter can be used There must be specified additional parameters 1 log name is the name of log 2 file is the type of requested data This parameter can be one of log files list of log files chan conf list of channels configuration group settings group settings conf xml other internal settings Example of viewing list of log files in log gX YYYY MM DD hh mm ss use this query syntax http lt IP_address gt cgi bin data cgi cmd log amp log_name gX_YYYY MM DD hh mm ss amp file log files Obtaining recorded data cmd part To obtain recorded data part parameter can be used There must be specified additional parameters 1 log name is the name of log 2 part no is the number of data file samples returns recorded channels data timestamp returns recorded time stamps raster returns samples interval 1 If there is no id_first nor id_last specified the whole data file will be returned When requesting samples file size can be even 1MB 280 User Manual For CONTROLLE
223. lation resistance gt 20MQ isolation strength between power supply and input output terminal 1min 2300V see Fig 4 1 PN EN 61326 1 340g only base see Fig 4 8 check the current list of measurement modules at producer s website see the full specification in the appendix 4 DEVICE INSTALLATION The unit has been designed and manufactured in a way assuring a high level of user safety and resistance to interference occurring in a typical industrial environment In order to take full advantage of these characteristics installation of the unit must be conducted correctly and according to the local regulations Read the basic safety requirements on page 5 prior to starting the installation Ensure that the power supply network voltage corresponds to the nominal voltage stated on the unit s identification label The load must correspond to the requirements listed in the technical data All installation works must be conducted with a disconnected power supply Protecting the power supply connections against unauthorized persons must be taken into consideration 10 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER This is a class A unit Class A equipment is suitable for use in all f N establishments other than domestic and those directly connected to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes This is group 1 unit Group 1 contains all equipment in the scope of thi
224. ler from the list 183 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER The parameters of Controllers are e 164 Name it gives the name to the Controller Mode in this parameter user can select control mode which is used to controller calculation algorithm there are 3 options e PD proportional derivative mode e PI proportional integral mode PID proportional integral derivative mode Dead zone this parameter determines how much the process variable must change in relation to its value in the previous cycle before it will be noticed by the controller it means that the output of the controller will be changed if the difference between Set point channel value and Feedback channel value more about Set point channel and Feedback channel parameters see Chapter 7 8 7 Logical Channels Controller mode exceeds the Dead zone value Controller parameters parameter block this block allows the user to set PID coefficients e coefficient this parameter is visible always allows to set value of the proportional coefficient e coefficient this parameter is available for Pl and PID mode and allows to set the integral coefficient e Dcoefficient this parameter is available for PD and PID mode and allows to set the derivative coefficient e Differentiated signal this parameter is available for PD and PID mode and allows the selection of the option see Fig 7 108 and Fig 7 109 feedba
225. llow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state 7 9 5 4 Analogue flowmeter modules Fl modules are equipped in two or four analogue flowmeters and same number of current inputs see Appendix 8 5 2 Fl4 FT2 FT4 FLOWMETER MODULES Analogue flowmeters are used to liquids gases and bulk materials flow measurement based on measured sensor current and calculating total flow in selected channel Each flow channel is equipped in IN n input and common ground GND All analogue channels are galvanically separated from the device The user can thanks to Scaling parameter in Logical channel see chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings interpret measured current by the device at its discretion which allows to cooperate with any kind of analogue sensors Current inputs are used to current measurement in typical ranges 0 20 mA 4 20mA and to facilitate their connection they are grouped and they have common ground but it is isolated from the supply voltage and other modules Analogue flowmeter parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays measurement unit mA Base unit defines unit which is used by the totalizer for example when flow measurement unit is
226. lock for these parameters the user selects the format and range of data displayed on the screen discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings 7 8 11 Examples of Logical Channels configuration Example 7 8 11 1 Application of Logical channel in the Hardware input mode for Ul4 module see the Appendix 8 2 UI4 UI8 112 U16 U24 116 124 VOLTAGE and CURRENT MEASUREMENT MODULES and Math function mode Task This example shows how to measure voltage and current and calculate a power consumption of the heater Voltage current and power of the heater must be display in one window in needle dials mode Additional in this example user must use external converters to measure voltage and current exceed the range of UI4 input module Solution First configure the device as described below then connect the heater to converters and then to the device in accordance with Fig 7 57 Current P osa COnVverter Heater epe a nen 0 400V Voltage 919 converter SERVICE 3 feno 4 24v DC 5 max 200mA Current digital input j 0 15 24V DC Rn Inp A5 Voltage 1 olated j Fig 7 57 Schematic diagram for the UI4 module In the next step you need to define three logical channels for current voltage and power To do this a For a current touch screen and press the Me
227. log was ended or text NULL if log is one of the current log event log reserved for future use dev settings reserved for future use Log data format description Contains information about specific log There can be following types of data group settings group settings of this log This is one line in following format group index e date when this log was created date when this log was ended or text NULL if log is one of the current log log description base log period alternative log period log mode 1 always 2 triggered by channel logical channel count in this group full group configuration file name channel index which is a base trigger or 1 if there is no channel channel index which is an alternative trigger or 1 if there is no channel log files information about all samples files created in this log in following format ID file number e file creation date e file end date or text NULL if file is being currently used chan conf settings of all channels that are being logged in following format channel index e selected data source index see Mode parameter in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings unit channel unit or if there is no unit available none translated into current device language label format index see Format parameter in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings
228. logical channel input source available for Function flip flop selects a logical channel which will be flip flop R input source input mode available for Function flip flop the user can set following options e disabled setting flip flop S input in inactive e from log channel means that flip flop S input source will be logical state of the selected logical channel e from channel negation means that flip flop S input source will be negated logical state of the selected logical channel 5 input source available for Function flip flop selects a logical channel which will be flip flop S input source Type of source Y available for certain math functions Available types are e channel meaning that the Y source will be a logical channel selected from a list in Source Y parameter e value means that the Y source will be a constant value entered in the Source Y parameter Source Y available for certain math functions Depends of Type of source Y parameter This parameter allows user to select logical channel from list Type of source Y channel e orenter set point value Type of source Y value A Unit available for certain trigonometric functions Allow an option to be selected degree radian Example of configuration of logical channel in Math function mode Steps to configure the function which summarizing values of logical channels 1 3 4 5 are shown in Fig 7 53 If any
229. lt IN13 IN14 2 IN15 T e o 16 x lt IN17 2 19 2 T e e 20 X x IN21 lt lt 22 2 gt 23 e 24 X _ 29 lt 24 4 0 20 4 0 20 4 0 20 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 20mA User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER UI4N8 8 resistance 4 current and 4 voltage inputs UI4D8 4 current and 4 voltage 8 digital inputs 2 2 4 0 20mA 05 A mn 2 4 x 0 10V in20 13 16 UI8N8 8 resistance UI8D8 8 current and voltage 8 current and voltage inputs 8 digital inputs GND Fig 4 11 Mixed input modules 4 0 20 4x0 100kO 4x0 100kO 4 x 0 10V 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 10V 4 x 0 20mA 4 x 0 20mA DA 4 x 0 10V TOC 1 040 in30 com 21 24 19 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 20 IS6 6 isolated current input Et D MEET NA n08 Fig 4 12 Ilsolated current input modules User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER FI2 2 flowmeter inputs 2 current inputse n01 05 2 x 0 20mA 102 47 6132 flowmeters _eIN3 M 0 ii 2 x 0 20mA no5jeno FI4 4 flowmeter inputs
230. lt gt Galvanic gt R 3 3M easuring 2 gt Interface lt gt lt gt Device system 4 isolation lt gt n05 o R 2k 2V 2 c 3 o 4 5 o Fig 8 14 Internal structure of the optoisolated Universal input module 250 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 9 08 D16 D24 OPTOISOLATED DIGITAL INPUTS MODULE D8 D16 D24 9 Digital inputs 16 Digital inputs 24 Digital inputs IN17 IN25 IN26 IN31 IN28 in26 4 IN21 n27 IN22 L n28 N23 IN30 in29 IN24 in30 21 24 Fig 8 15 Digital input module D8 D16 D24 n01 n02 n03 n04 05 06 08 09 n10 n11 n12 n13 n14 n15 n16 n18 n19 20 13 16 D8 016 024 modules with 8 16 24 digital inputs respectively Inputs divided into groups of four input every Every group has own common terminal and is optically isolated from others groups and CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER GND signal as well Most important parameters of D8 D16 and D24 modules D8 D16 D24 Number of inputs 8 16 24 2 groups 4 inputs each optoisolated from others signals 4 groups 4 inputs each optoisolated from others signals 6 groups 4 inputs each optoisolated from other signals Input si
231. lue of logical channel Fig 49 Data panels for Logical channel in Set point value mode Touch amp hold 2 3 sec Logic channel 2 Name Set poin numeric Mode Set point value Unit Set point value 2 23 Set point value Enter value 99999 99999 Set point value Name Set point binary Enter value 99999 99999 m m 1 G01 Group Mode Setpointvalue Set poin numeric Unit _7 _ EN c O 4 00 Set point value 0 0000 4 Fig 7 50 Configuration of the value for Logical channel in Set point value for the disabled button 92 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Manual operation of a button in the data panel Action button in the data panel depends on the parameters from Latch block description of the Latch parameter block in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings and on the Format parameter in the Displaying parameter block description of the Displaying parameter block in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings a for disabled latch function see Fig 7 51 For format numeric and time after pressing the button an edit window appears allowing entry of value see Fig 7 6 this value will be a source of data for that Logical channel binary pressing the button causes a switch between the states 0 and 1 display in the data panel in acco
232. m s the base unit is m Mode defines current range of selected input 0 20mA 4 20mA and the time base which is used during the measurement pulses per second pulser per minute pulser per hour Low limit value which determines measured current bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state but the actual flow value still will be used in balance calculation High limit value which determines measured current above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state but the actual flow value still will be used in balance calculation 140 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Totalizer configuration submenu which contains totalizer settings e Reset now manual reset of the totalizer e Reset mode turns on and off reset from logical channel e Reset source allows to choose a logical channel from the list which will reset the totalizer when value in this channel will be greater than O Strobe mode turns on and off balance calculating from logical channel e Strobe source allows to choose logical channel from list which will hold balance calculating in totalizer this do not reset the totalizer and do not stops flow measurement balance calculating is hold when value in this logical channel is equal or lower than zero e Counting direction turns on and off change of the counting direction e Direction source allow to choose a logical channel from the list
233. m youngest unit with maintaining all restrictions see Fig 7 38 Minus signs is displayed only before the highest unit of the Time Pattern When the highest unit can not be displayed in logical channel minus sign will not appear and value in this channel will be considered as a positive value G10 Time format Part 1 of 3 305163 31 Number of seconds 1000000 0 0 Part 2 of 3 Part 3 of 3 4 10min 1 4 1s 03 12 4 6 03 000 0 50 1000 0 36 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS 1000 Fig 7 38 Example of time Format view with Precision 0 000 and standard Time Pattern ww dd hh mm ss Graph low minimum range value for graphs bars needle dials and percentage bars see Fig 7 39 Graph high maximum range value for graphs bars needle dials and percentage bars see Fig 7 39 73 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER G01 Group 1 p 00 G01 Group 1 Actual flow Valve position index m m A Set point Flow unit index Flow unit inde _ 22 Flowmeter nui 2 0 11 19 00 E SHOW NAVIGATION KEY 18 45 11 18 50 111855 l nmin Los cane PENES FN Displaying Format numeric Precision 0 00 B On statetext BN Graphilow 0 Graph low 0 Graph high 70 Graph high G01 Group 1 Actual flow Valve position index G01 Group 1 Actual flow m 2011 02 0 11 19 20
234. mat in Slave device in First register parameter write 1h in Last register parameter write 2h create next block by pressing sign Block type parameter set as write HOLDING reg Register size parameter set as 16 bit registers according to registers format in Slave device First register parameter write 4h in Last register parameter write 4h create next block by pressing sign Block type parameters set as write HOLDING reg Register size parameter set as 16 bit registers according to registers format in Slave device First register parameter write 8h in Last register parameter write 8h move to the Device templates parameter block press Save device template button in the Save device template menu enter the template name eg Write do device stored template can be used to configure the device to a different address 219 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 16 NETWORK AND REMOTE DISPLAY SETTINGS General settings Logical channels Built in inputs Built in outputs External outputs Profiles timers Controllers Groups Modbus MENU Device configuration Network settings Access options 1 This button is visible only for device which is equipped in ACM ETU module Network settings allows the user to configure the network settings by downloading and visualizing the data from the device through
235. mber of already made cycles of Profile Return to position this parameter is invisible if Looping parameter is set as disabled allows to select a fixed position from which every next generated Profile has to start Section 1 23 4 5 Profile Idle value LSS p Time s 123 4 5 Fig 7 101 Sample of Profile timer User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Triggerring source signal gt Time 5 a level gate 4 Idle value 4 56 7 8 011 12 13 14 s y lime s 1 b edge once 4 0 11 12 13 14 Idle value y Time s 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 edge retrig 4 Idle value _ y Time s 1 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Fig 7 102 Samples of Profile output waveforms defined in Fig 7 101 triggered by signal selected in Triggering source parameter for Triggering mode level gate edge once edge retrig 7 12 3 Profiles timers Triggering mode on time The parameters of Profiles timers for triggering mode on time are Name it gives the name to the Profile timer Triggering mode on time allows to trigger the Profile at demanded time defined in Triggering times parameter Triggering times submenu with the parameters which defines times of Profile triggering This parameters are Months Days Week days Hours Minutes Seconds User Ma
236. meter set as Source Inp A2 Thermocouple see Fig 7 63 Other parameters are set as the sensor 1 For the temperature reading of sensor 3 with the symbol A3 Using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Logical channel except for 1 and 2 for example 3 in Name parameter write Temperature A3 Mode parameter set as hardware input Source parameter set as Source Inp A3 Thermocouple see Fig 7 63 Other parameters are set as the sensor 1 d For the temperature reading of sensor 4 with the symbol A4 118 Using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Logical channel except for 1 2 and 3 for example 4 in Name parameter write Temperature A4 Mode parameter set as hardware input Source parameter set as Source Inp A4 Thermocouple see Fig 7 63 Other parameters are set as the sensor 1 For alarm state using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Logical channel except for 1 2 3 and 4 eg 5 in Name parameter write Alarm Mode parameter set as Math function enter the Function submenu to select the appropriate function that allows the calculation alarm condition e Function parameter set as All X i gt Y e Source X parameter select logical channels 1 2 3 4 which we defined as measure of temperature X error handling parameter set as errors forwarded to result e of source Y parameter set as value e Source Y parameter write 14
237. meter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 0 in Graph low parameter write 0 e in Graph high parameter write 10 The way of configuring logical channel Triggering source in Hardware input mode for current input is shown in Example 7 8 11 1 we configure this way the logical channel 2 The second method is described in Chapter 7 8 11 Examples of Logical Channels configuration in the Example 7 8 11 9 Example 7 12 4 2 Application of the Profiles timers Task The task is to create a Profile timer in logical channel 3 which will generate its profile from the moment of turning on the device till turning it off The profile consist of two sections 1 const value 1 during 0 2 second 2 const value 0 during 1 8 second Value Time s Fig 7 106 An example of the waveform 181 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Solution To complete the task a logical channel in Profile timer Mode will be needed touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Profiles timers menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Profile timer such as 1 in Name parameter write Waveform generator Triggering mode parameter set as on time enter the Triggering times submenu 182 enter the Months menu and press the icon on the bottom left side of the screen enter the Days menu and press the icon on the bottom left side of the screen enter the Week days
238. meters this block of parameters appear if you have license for logging e Mode parameter set as always we want to register at all times until the we change the configuration to stop the registration e Description parameter write Measure of Workplace temperature it can be any text Base period parameter set as 1 e Base unit parameter set as minute sampling a group of channels at 1 minute e Alternative mode parameter set as disabled The last step is to define the Initial view displayed on the LCD screen when the device starts Initial view has to display a defined group of logical channels 30 31 32 33 in bars mode To do this enter General settings menu for Initial view block parameters e Display mode parameter set as bars e Displayed group parameter set as Group 2 Workplace Finally you must exit the menu by pressing the Save changes button The result of the changes will be visible after a call to the first measurement and manual switch for displaying Group 2 Example of a window view for 4 logical channels is shown in Fig 7 66 121 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER G s TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Fig 7 66 Logical channels configuration Example 3 Example 7 8 11 4 Application of Logical channel in the Hardware output monitor mode for R45 R81 modules see the Appendix 8 13 R45 R81 R65
239. mount of returned data to ID range from 123 to 321 execute a query like http lt IP_address gt cgi bin data cgi cmd lt command gt amp id_first 123 amp id_last 321 amp additional parameters Format of the id first and id last Numbers can be given to each parameter in decimal or hexadecimal notation can be mixed one can be decimal one hexadecimal 1 decimal id last 1234 2 hexadecimal id lastzZ0x4D2 0 402 1234 1 id_first and id_last are indexed from 0 It means that firs value is at index 0 second at index 1 etc The cmd parameter This parameter specifies the type of requested data It can be one of the following values 1 info returns devices information text http 192 168 1 176 cgi bin data cgi cmd info 2 current returns current logical channels measurements text 3 settings returns current logical channels settings text 4 main log returns general device logging information text 5 log returns specified log information text 6 part returns recorded data of specified log More about cmd parameter see in this chapter bellow 278 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Obtaining measurements cmd current Current measurements can be obtained by using value current of cmd parameter This feature should not be used as a replace of recording data functionality because it causes high device load Use this feature to sporadic device measurement check Example of
240. nally each Group has its own individual name making operation with the device very clear Every Logical Channel can belong to one or more groups simultaneously and also not to belong to any group then it will not be shown but it can still be used for other processes lt is common that channels belonging to the same Group are related to one another in some way for example representing parameters of single object or representing similar parameters of few separate objects but it is also possible to create a Group consisting of completely unrelated channels Overview of the concept is presented in Fig 5 2 tiia 8 14 5 8 7 8 9 20 neat 1 3 4 5 8 9 G04 Group 4 Preassure Visualization and logging 1 gt 2 3 gt Temperature Humidity c 15 00 ox ode Fig 5 2 An overview of the concept of Group in the device Using Groups Logical Channels and mathematical combinations of them gives incredible flexibility to the software allowing for ease in designing advanced control methods and visualisation with a low cost CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER More information about Groups and samples of Group configurations are presented in Chapter 7 14 GROUPS 34 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 5 2 HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS The functionality of CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER can fit to the user s needs The base of the CONTROLLER DA
241. nel 2 named Valve position e Slot 3 parameter set as logical channel 3 named Alarm state e other parameters Slot 4 6 set as disabled because we want to display only three logical channels on the screen all other parameters should be on default settings The last step is to define the Initial view displayed on the LCD screen when the device starts Initial view has to display a defined Group 1 in values mode To do this 170 enter General settings menu for Initial view block parameters e Display mode parameter set as values e Displayed group parameter set as Group 1 Flowmeter Finally you should exit menu by pressing Save changes button The result of the changes will be visible after a call to the first measurement User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 12 PROFILES TIMERS General settings Logical channels Built in inputs Built in outputs External outputs MENU Device configuration p Profiles timers Controllers Groups Modbus Network settings Access options Profiles timers menu allow the user to define any profile timer which can be used to control any process 7 12 1 Profile timer General settings In the device there are 8 independent settings of Profiles timers available Configured Profile timer can be used by any Logical channel switched to Profile timer mode Fig 7 79 see also Chapter 7 8 8 Logical Channels Profile timer mode D
242. nels General settings 146 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Time format is an advanced method of data presentation in format of time User can easily get a desired format by entering a formatting string composed of letters and colons for example a string w d hh mm lets user to display data as number of weeks days hours and minutes separated by colons This mechanism allows also for dividing the result on two or three independent channels The maximum displaying precision is 1 1000 of a second Input data must be expressed in seconds Hourmeters parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays measurement unit sec Mode read only parameter which displays measured physical quantity Time Low Limit value determining amount of pulses bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High Limit value determining amount of pulses bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state Satrt Stop inp trig allows to define when the device should start or stop counting e high level the device is counting time during high value on counting input e low level the device is counting time during low value on counting input rising edge the device starts counting time when it detects rising edge on input signal The device stops
243. neral settings menu for Initial view block parameters Display mode parameter set as values e Displayed group parameter set as Group 1 Measure Temp 1 Finally you must exit the menu by pressing the button Save changes The result of the changes will be visible after calling the first measurement Use GROUP or GROUP 1 button in the navigation bar to switch between display groups 127 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example 7 8 11 7 Application in Math function mode see Chapter 7 8 6 Logical Channels Math function mode Task The task is to create a logical channel with the function returns a value of logical channel X i selected by the other logical channel Y Suppose we have defined four logical channels 1 5 8 12 in Set point mode However in the logical channel 2 will be the value derived from the temperature sensor In the logical channel 3 create math function X i selected by the Y Using the value of channel 2 we select value from the channels 1 5 8 12 The result of this function is placed in Tab 7 4 Y value Value of logical channel 3 lt 0 Value of logical channel 1 O Ys1 Value of logical channel 5 1 Yx2 Value of logical channel 8 Y gt 2 Value of logical channel 12 Tab 7 4 Example of configure function X i selected by the Y X i Logical channel 1 gt Output Logical channel 5 gt Logical cha
244. ng Depending on type the device can be equipped with different number of Logical channels and other functions Their amount is shown in table bellow type 96 x 96 144 x 144 LC logical channels 60 90 60 with logging option Di digital inputs 48 72 Ai analog inputs 48 72 Rel SSR relays SSR 16 48 36 72 Ao analog outputs 12 24 MP Modbus ports 4 4 F math functions 34 34 G groups 10 15 P t Profile timers 8 8 C controllers 8 8 Tab 5 1 Maximum amount of functions included in device 32 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Hardware input Built in output 1 1 mE 2 _ Relay SSR Digital input elay Di Rel SSR 1 1 i 2 2 Analog output Analog input nalog outpu Ai Ao Digital input 24V X2 X1 Sound signal Virtual demo input X3 V1 sinus tringle X4 V2 Virtual relay rectangular X5 Logical Output monitor External output 1 chan nel output address port Relays 2 1 1 1 1 Rel 100 255 Sound signal x1 2 1 1 V1 3 E EN gt UO V2 100 255 POS Virtual relay 4 1 1 V16 MP 5 100 255 Modbus port address Groups 1 Slot Group
245. nge settings The parameters of the General settings menu are Basic parameter block this block includes two parameters Language this parameter allows the user to select the language available languages are English Polish Spanish German Russian French Czech Romanian and Hungarian Date and time this parameter allows the user to set the current date and time Reg num displaying this parameter allows to change mode of displaying the Register addresses for Logical channel and External output menu Two formats are available hexadecimal the registers are displayed in hexadecimal format To indicate that data has a hexadecimal format the letter h is added at the end for example 12h 0x12 decimal the registers are displayed in decimal format without any marker e g 123 LCD screen parameter block Backlight this parameter allows the user to set the level of the LCD backlight Available levels are 20 least backlight 40 60 80 100 the most backlight Screen saver parameter block these parameters can reduce backlight level of the LCD screen or make it completely blank during normal operation i e when the user does not touch the screen for a set time This block has two parameters Mode this parameter has the following options disabled this option turns off screen savers the LCD screen is illuminated at all times according to parameter settings Backlight see abov
246. nnel Logical channel 8 Logical channel 12 Logical channel 2 Select Logical channel Fig 7 71 The block diagram of a mathematical function X i selected by Y Solution We define a logical channels in Set point value mode touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any logical channel such as 1 in Name parameter write 1 Mode parameter set as Set point value in Set point value parameter write 50 126 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER for Displaying block parameters Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 e in Graph low write 0 e in Graph high write 50 Other logical channels set the same way logical channel 5 Name 5 Set point value 30 logical channel 8 Name 8 Set point value 80 logical channel 12 Name 12 Set point value 5 For Logical channel in Math function mode using the arrows in the top navigation bar select logical channel 1 in Name parameter write Function Mode parameter set as Math function enter Function submenu to select the appropriate function that allows the calculation of the mean value Function parameter set as X i selected by Y e in Source X parameter select logical channels 1 5 8 12 which we defined as a constant values
247. noted by 5 Every Group of Logical Channels can be presented in one of 6 modes 40 as numerical values Fig 6 6 as horizontal bars Fig 6 7 as vertical bars Fig 6 7 as horizontal charts Fig 6 8 as vertical charts Fig 6 8 as phasor charts Fig 6 9 as needle dials Fig 6 10 G04 Group 4 2013 48 04 G05 Group5 2017 47 54 Pressure Humidity m sec 1 i 2 800 38 0 0 60 Temperature Humidity Torque 7 2 C RH Nm a 3 Current 1500 516 375 1 1 100 0 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW PAETI KEYS SCREEN r e e Fig 6 6 Examples of Numerical Values presentation mode User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER G04 Group 4 2002 38 22 kPa 0 57 6 m 3 440 rr C Humidity RH 0 30 60 48 3 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS G05 Group 5 ee Heating po 58 44 564 243 16 19 60 100 35 50 20 0 10_ 0 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Fig 6 7 Examples of Horizontal for 3 channels and Vertical Bars for 5 channels 04 Group 4 2009 05 31 7 40 42 17 40 20 17 40 25 17 40 30 17 40 35 17 40 TOUCH THE SCREEN SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS 180 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS Pressure 4115 s 29 42 6 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION KEYS G 05 Group 5 2017 51 37 p 1 1 30 60 ity 17 51 55 51 17 51 597 y dir 17 17 51 45
248. nu button press the Device configuration button enter the Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Logical channel such as 20 in Name parameter write Current Mode parameter set as Hardware input Source parameter set as Inp Current see the connection in Fig 7 57 press the Source configuration button to set the source configuration options e Mode parameter set as 0 20mA current range because this current range comes from current converter Low Limit parameter set as 0mA e High Limit parameter set as 20mA Scaling parameter set as linear e 110 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER press the Configure scaling button e Output unit parameter write A e in Input value parameter in the Point 1 section write e in Output value parameter in the Point 1 section write OA e in Input value parameter the Point 2 section write 20mA in Output value parameter in the Point 2 section write 5A for Display block parameters Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 0 Graph low parameter write 0A e Graph high parameter write 5A all other parameters should be on default settings Configuration steps are shown on Fig 7 58 b For a voltage using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any logical channel such as 21 in Name parameter write Voltage Mode paramete
249. nual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Idle value the value which occurs at the idle state which means before and after generating the Profile timer Section list submenu in which the user can define up to 100 sections generated by the Profile timer For more information see Chapter 7 12 1 Profile timer General settings Looping each Profile timer has an ability to repeat its generated signal this parameter has options e disabled the profile is not repeated e counted allows to generate the profile specified number of times defined in Loop count parameter e from logical channel allows to run the profile number of times equals the value in the selected logical channel determined by the Looping source parameter e infinite allows to infinite repeating of generated Profile Loop count this parameter is visible only if Looping parameter is set as counted defines the number of repetitions of generated Profile Looping source this parameter is visible only if Looping parameter is set as from logical channel It allows to choose a logical channel from the list which value will be compared with the number of already made cycles of Profile Return to position this parameter is invisible if Looping parameter is set as disabled allows to select a fixed position from which every next generated Profile has to start Parameters in Triggering times submenu allows define moment of generating the Pro
250. o Vcc 2 F F 100mA 500mA e OUT 9 16 Driver OUT 9 16 e o GND Fig 8 23 Internal structure of the SSR output module 16 outputs 260 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Main board 10V 2 x oVcc 1 100mA 500mA O O OUT 1 8 Driver OUT 1 8 e O o GND e e E o Vcc 2 lt gt Interface F F 100mA 500mA O O OUT 9 16 Driver OUT 9 16 e O o GND gt o Vcc 3 F F 100mA 500mA O O OUT 17 24 Driver OUT 17 24 e O d o GND Fig 8 24 Internal structure of the SSR output module 24 outputs 261 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 13 R45 R81 R65 R121 RELAY MODULES R45 4 relay outputs 5A 250V R81 8 relay outputs 1A 250V R65 OUT1 6 relay outputs 5A 250V e OUT1 f OUT3 7 p f our f O OUT1 R121 12 relay outputs 1A 250V O OUT2 c d nos OUT4 n06 5 OUT5 OUT6 masl y OUT3 d OUT7 oN OUT8 m y OUT4 m2 TA m OUT6 OUT3 gt OUTA gt J not noz nos n04 nos nos nos no9 mo n nts m4 e VID Y of F M 5 N Fig 8
251. of an object with the Controller implemented in the device Set the setting of the selected Controller to be connected to the Logical channel operating in the Controller mode In this Logical channel select a Set point channel and the Feedback channel which store the data required to control the object Respectively Set point channel contains a destination value of the process while the Feedback channel includes the value of feedback coming from the object controlled MultiCon uses data collected from these channels and the corresponding Controller controls the object Device Controller Set point II channel Logical channel in _ Feedback Controller mode channe Built in output E or External output object feedback Fig 7 108 Block diagram of the control loop of the object by MultiCon Set piont S en Sp gn A et piont Sp x p g X sn gt X 127 gt 1 i 1 PI GS 3 PID High output limit t Offset Sampling 0 1 s 1 Y R Dead zone dz 2 o P gt gt dn yn pA Feedback gn gt Td XI gil 2 L T Low output limit Differentiated signal CE 1 Error deviation 2 Feedback measured Fig 7
252. of exceeds Level value until the output switch from high to low state see Fig 7 83 Minimum ON time the minimum duration of a high state if the output switches to high state the low state will occur after this time see Fig 7 84 Minimum OFF time the minimum duration of a low state if the output switches to low state the high state will occur after this time see Fig 7 84 153 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Input value 4 Zone A Level P A Pe Zone B gt Time s 2 9 aol Wl 421 431 14 Time s At 2s ON delay OFF delay Fig 7 83 Principle of relay output operation for sample timing settings On delay 1 sec OFF delay 2 sec Input value 4 Zone A Level Zone B gt Time s 9 101 111 121 431 44 Y Zone A 0 Z 2 Time s ma t 4s Min ON time Min OFF time Fig 7 84 Principle of relay output operation for sample timing settings Min ON time 5 sec Min OFF time 4 sec 154 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER ow KARIES ON delay 0 sec OFF delay 0 sec Min ON time 0 1 sec Min OFF time 0 1 sec Timing Fig 7 85 Timing settings for different modes 7 10 3 Build in output Pulse width modulation mode for SSR relay output Technical specifications of SSR relay can be found in Appendix 8 12 S8
253. ogging temperature 6 O n Fig 7 11 File editor single file selection Fig 7 12 File editor multiple file selection 44 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Functions of common buttons Exit exits from current menu or sub menu OW accept choice or changes of edit dialogue and exit from this dialogue Cancel reject entered choice or changes of edit dialogue and exit from this dialogue Selection of element for editing Arrow buttons allow the user to select successive elements groups logical channels controllers or outputs The middle button allows a direct selection of particular element from the list Navigation keys in choice type dialogues Move arrows Allow to move cursor along the edited text Caps lock switches between lower and upper case letters tp C yx Backspace When editing values pressing this button deletes last visible number When editing text the last edited symbol shown directly before cursor is deleted Clear clears the whole number when editing values Sign changes the sign of the edited value This button deletes the selected file All selects all the available options None deselects all the available options Press this button to enter Text editor window Add a new object HHE pisi Dele
254. on strength between individual measurements inputs 2kV 2kV Measurement accuracy 30ppm 25 C 30ppm 25 C 256 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER HM2 HM4 Temperature stability 50ppm K 50ppm K Counting range 0 10 9 sec 0 10 9 sec Counting resolution 0 001 sec 0 001 sec Protection 50mA auto reset fuse 50mA auto reset fuse Isolation strength 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC between internal circuits and measurements inputs Weight 28g 32 3g Tab 8 20 Technical data for the HM2 and HM4 modules Isolation F50mA R 1 4k START STOP 1 50 R 1 4k 1 lt Interface 3 Main board STARTISTOP 2 3 4 o PRG 2 3 4 2 3 4 Fig 8 20 Internal structure of the optoisolated hourmeters modules 257 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 12 S8 S16 S24 SOLID STATE RELAY DRIVERS MODULES S8 S16 S24 8 SSR outputs 16 SSR outputs 24 SSR outputs 410 24V DC 10 24V DC 10 24V DC Fig 8 21 SSR modules 258 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Most important parameters of S8 S16 and S24 modules Static parameters Number of outputs 16 in 2 groups w
255. onent of Source Y value 1 value of channel 1 to power to value of channel 2 logy X Logarithm of Source X value with respect to base of Source Y value logia 4 logarithm of channel 4 with respect to base of channel 2 min X reset by Y Minimal value of selected channel X if value of channel YSO or current value of X reset if value of Y gt 0 min 1 reset by 4 minimal value of channel 1 reset by channel 4 max X reset by Y Maximal value of selected channel X if value of channel YSO or current value of X reset if value of Y gt 0 max 1 reset by 4 maximal value of channel 1 reset by channel 4 derivative of X Derivative of Source X parameter value derivative of 7 derivative of value in channel 7 integral of X Integral of Source X parameter value integral of 3 integral of value in channel 3 count X pulses Counter of rising edges in Source X parameter count 11 pulses channel 11 pulses counter flip flop JK type flop flop with clock input and asynchronous R and inputs filp flop average of X Current average of Source X parameter value with saturation and without forgetting average of 1 average of value in channel 1 Tab 7 3 Available math functions In the device the values of logical channel S 0 are interpreted as a 0 logic and the values of logical channel gt 0 as a 1 logic 101 Us
256. onfiguration changes Load save configuration will load save the configuration defined by the user which includes general settings see Chapter 7 7 GENERAL SETTINGS logical channel settings built in external inputs settings built in external output settings Modbus protocol settings profile timer settings control settings network settings group settings Load save Modbus templates allows the user to load save the configuration of the Modbus MASTER protocol e g name configuration of the device channels the list of inputs and outputs configuration of register blocks block list see Chapter 7 15 3 Modbus MASTER mode Having saved these Modbus templates means the user can at any time quickly establish a connection between the MultiCon and the SLAVE devices needing only to choose the appropriate address of the SLAVE devices more about templates in Chapter 7 15 3 Modbus MASTER mode 50 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Load save Modbus slave templates allows the user to load save the configuration of the Modbus SLAVE protocol with a defined block of registers e g register type Holding Input write mode of register data format 16 bits or 32 bits For configuration of Modbus SLAVE see Chapter 7 15 2 Modbus SLAVE mode The process of exchanging configuration files or Modbus templates between the MultiCon and flash drive starts when
257. ontroller of source X Reset mode Controller num Set point channel Feedback channel Delete point Prog inp mode n Prog inp trig Processing Mode Profile timer X error handling Filter Source Do osteo 5 E TE S I Zero time i ing Configure source 22222222557 ME Filter time r Filter type Mode Pit cycle counter Totalizer Filterconf Source cs sss s gt Displaying Configure source lt E SOUNGE Format Mode i Mode Data from other ch Unit Dormat pattern ee es ee S Source i L li it E P ow limi Quantity 1 Digits EM i i Mode High limit i Latch E Off state text _ E x Mode Blink period Min simulated val Rina Sa ae a On state text Triggering source Trig Hold time Max simulates val p I Period 1 ___ Tigger ___ I Graph high 1 1 Alarm level _ High state time a i Channel highlight Color
258. options are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bit sec Format data format of the RS 485 interface available options are shown in the Tab 7 6 Format Number of data bits parity control Number of stop bits 8N1 8 none 1 8N2 8E1 none even 8O1 8O2 odd odd Tab 7 6 Data format of the RS 485 interface 8 2 8 1 8E2 8 even 2 8 1 8 2 200 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Address SLAVE device address available address range 1 255 SLAVE settings submenu where the user can configure available read and or write registers For more information see below The parameters of the Modbus TCP IP protocol ethernet communication for SLAVE mode are Mode SLAVE SLAVE settings submenu where the user can configure available read and or write registers for more information see below See Chapter 7 15 2 3 Modbus SLAVE The Modbus protocol handling for detailed description of MODBUS protocol handling in MultiCon device Notes on Modbus TCP IP allows the device to keep up to 3 connections more connections disconnect the one that is the longest in the network notimplemented queuing priorities of customers no access control to device based on client IP address SLAVE settings menu This menu allows the user to define type data format and registers activity which are available to the MultiCon device In this menu t
259. ormat and range of the data displayed on the screen For more information about Displaying parameters see below in this Chapter 67 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Processing parameter block For this block the parameters are Scaling Filter type To enter the scaling menu press the button next to the Scaling label The menu has the following options a disabled no scaling of input data b linear after choosing this option parameter appears e Configure scaling submenu which allows the user to change unit in this logical channel and rescale value using two points This submenu contains following options Input unit read only parameter it displays unit of the logical channel source A Output unit unit of rescaled data Point 1 block contains following options nput value value of point 1 before scaling Output value value of point 1 after scaling Point 2 block contains following options Input value value of point 2 before scaling A Output value value of point 2 after scaling In MultiCon linear scaling can be done in with table placed below but slope and offset are constant values and they should be determined by user earlier Input value Output value Point 1 X y slope x offset Point 2 X2 y2 slope x gt offset Tab 7 2 The way to calculate the output value Example The task is to rescale temperature
260. ous measurement visualisation and control of numerous channels This device can operate autonomously or with cooperation with external measurement devices and actuators Essential features of CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER are listed and briefly described below e Advanced processing unit and system based on LINUX The powerful CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER processor allows the device to run under the control of a LINUX operating system Such a solution makes the firmware flexible and gives the possibility of simultaneous operation of many processes like measurement communication visualisation The use of LINUX also makes software independent of installed hardware Color TFT display with Touch panel The CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER displays all data and dialogue on a legible 320x240 pixels color TFT screen Full control of the device is realised using the built in touch panel which makes operating the CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER easy and intuitive Hardware flexibility and a large variety of possible configurations CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER is designed as modular device consisting of a base and optional input and output modules The base contains main processor A display with touch screen Switch Mode Power Supply 19V 24 50V DC 16V 24 35V AC e 85V 230 260V User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER basic communication interfaces USB and RS485 three slots marked as A B C designed for installation of measu
261. owmeter Modbus settings Baud rate 19200 bit sek Slave address 5 Registers Register 1h Register 2h Register 4h Register 8h Power supply depending on version USB host digital input lt 0 15 24V DC GND RS 485 A isolated Fig 7 96 Connection diagram for Modbus MB2 Solution First we need to configure settings in Modbus menu as it is shown in Example 7 15 4 2 Next We configure logical channels used to set values which will be send by RS 485 to the output To do this touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Logical channel such as 1 in Name parameter write Set point value Mode parameter set as Set point value in Set point value parameter write 50 for Displaying block parameters e Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 Graph low parameter write 0 e Graph high parameter write 65535 Next two logical channels set similarly A Logical channel 2 e Name parameter write Valve position e in Set point value write 1 168 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Logical channel 3 Name parameter write Alarm state e Set point parameter write 0 all other parameters should be on default settings We define external o
262. panels Chapter 6 3 3 Temperature Navigation bar Chapter 6 3 2 MODE MENU GROUP Fig 6 1 Typical view of a CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER main page after touching display 6 3 1 Information bar The Information bar informs the user about current display group logging actual date and time name of the group which is visible on the display ues oa Sn T cid 04 Group 4 date group number logging data indicator time Fig 6 2 View of information bar Information bar displays Fig 6 2 name of the Group visible on the screen in place of standard name e g Group 4 It is possible to enter a more descriptive name for clarity for more information see Chapter 7 14 GROUPS group number number of the currently displayed Group to change the displayed Group press button GROUP SROUP1 in the Navigation bar see Chapter 6 3 2 Navigation bar time and date actual time and date display on the right upper corner on the screen can be set in General settings see Chapter 7 7 GENERAL SETTINGS logging data indicator located in the Information bar the logging data indicator changes color depending of state logging gray color data logging option is not activated to activate the data logging option you need to enter the licence key provided by the manufacturer see Chapter 7 4 DEVICE INFORMATION LICENCE FIRMWARE UPDATE REMOTE DISPLAY EXPORT MANUAL AND RENEW CONFIGURA
263. ple of this view is posted in Fig 7 123 G04 Group 4 du G04 Group 4 D 2017337235 Pressure Pressure Temperature kPa 29 42 30 2 1 1 5 1 6 _ CX 40 49 Temperature uu Humidity m RH mn m T 1 7 1 15 00 516 gt Re 10_ 0 35 bem 289 TOUCH SCREEN T mL W TNTSxPDS c Fig 7 123 Example of three channels presentation with emphasis of Pressure Switching between modes it is noticeable that position of particular channels can slightly vary It is caused by aspect of different modes their position is selected in that way to obtain elements of particular data panels as big as possible 198 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 15 MODBUS General settings Logical channels Built in input Built in outputs External outputs Profiles timers Controllers Groups Modbus Device configuration Network settings Access options The basic version of MultiCon has one RS 485 port built in The communication ability can be increased by installing a communication module into slot D of the device Fig 7 124 This module offers 2 additional serial ports one RS 485 and one RS 485 RS 232 and one ethernet port which allows the creation of an advanced Multi Modbus system In the current software version a MODBUS RTU and MODBUS TCP IP protocol are available and every port can be switched to Slave or Master except port 4 w
264. ption enables a filter that is expressed by the formula 0 1 sek 0 1 sek Y X 1 e Y pe where n number of sample where n 1 2 3 Y output value for n th sample Yn output value for n 1 sample X input value for n th sample W time constant in seconds this filter coefficient is defined by the user from the Decay constant parameter a value of 0 for the filter is turned off 0 1 sec sample time After selecting smoothing option in Filter type parameter new button is available Filter configuration which allows the user to enter a time constant with the Decay constant parameter see above filter formula 15 P output value 10 90 100 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 time s Fig 7 36 Example of the input signal red chart filtered signal for the time constant 5s green chart and time constant 15s blue chart 72 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER peak detect function which allows to detect and visualize peak values in measured signal Detection of the peak value can be done if the measured signal raises and drops or the opposite by value which is settable by the user Next the detected value can be hold for settable by user period of time If during the time when peak is detected new peak is detected then the peak value is updated and the time of hold is reset When this time will elapse or no peak is detected the device will display current val
265. r no data shift Data mask read only parameter no data mask Status register this parameter allows the user to review the number and data format of the status register Dec point register this parameter allows the user to review the number and data format of the decimal point register 203 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Avail output blocks submenu This submenu is read only and consist of following fields Block type read only parameter user can review the options that were set in the Output list submenu Available options read HOLDING register read only register write HOLDING register read and write register read INPUT register read only register Register size defines data size can be set to e 16 bit registers data is read preset as 16 bit registers this value can be also used for 32 bit registers reading preseting In a such case data is composed as two 16 bit registers e 32 bit registers for 32 bit registers reading preseting only data is read as one 32 bit register First register value indicating the number of the first register of the block Last register value indicating the number of the last register of the block for a single block with one 16 bit register the parameter First register and Last register must be the same number register HOLDING registers can be set as read or read and write That is why when Block type parameter is set as
266. r Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 14 3 Groups Examples of visualisations of groups Example 7 14 3 1 Single channel one big needle Task The task is to create Group with only one logical channel The value of that channel should be displayed in whole screen in needle mode Solution Let s assume that we have configured logical channel in Hardware input Mode for RTD module The logical channel is named Temperature and it displays heater temperature example of logical channels configuration are shown in Chapter 7 8 11 Examples of Logical Channels configuration especially see Example 7 8 11 3 We need to define Group with logical channel in order to display it on the device screen To do that enter Groups menu and turn on Group 1 if it is turned off in Name parameter write Heater for Channels parameter block e Slot 1 parameter set as Logical channel 1 named Temperature e Slot 2 6 set as disabled all other parameter should be on default settings Next we need to define Initial view To do this enter General settings menu forlnitial view parameter block Display mode parameter set as needles e Displayed group parameter set as Group 1 Heater Finally leave this menu and press Save settings button Result of just made changes will be visible after first measurement is called Example of this view is posted in Fig 7 122 01 Heater 0 TOUCH THE SCREEN TO SHOW NAVIGATION
267. r Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER The duty cycle D is defined as the ratio between the pulse duration t and the period T of a rectangular waveform duty cycle T where t is the duration that the function is active T is the period of the function D 1 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Input 0 value 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 Lower Upper level level Fig 7 86 Normalized duration t of the output signal in PWM mode for parameters Lower level 4 Upper level 14 input signal lower than 4 has t 0 higher than 14 has t 1 Timing parameter block The parameters of this block include Period the duration of one cycle of output pulse the minimum value is O 1 seconds Minimum ON time minimum duration of high state after switching to high state switch back is possible after Minimum On time see Fig 7 87 Minimum OFF time minimum duration of low state after switching to low state switch back is possible after Minimum OFF time see Fig 7 87 156 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Parameter Minimum ON time Minimum OFF time t 10s D 50 10 Eu Y PWM output V Yale 0 0 20 1 40 50 T 20s Time s Fig 7 87 Sample of output signal of SSR relay in PWM mode O 70 80 90 100 7 10 4 Built in output Current output Output Mame Qut AT Current Unit mA Source Log ch 1 Inp
268. r Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER e Source X parameter set as logical channel where the temperature measurement is shown e of source Y parameter set as channel Source Y parameter set as logical channel named as First level Precision parameter set as 0 0 A Graph low parameter set as 50 Graph high parameter set as 85 other parameters should be set as default Logical channel 5 Calculating the time of the second alarm n Name parameter write Calc Second level Mode parameter set as Math function A Click on the Function button Function parameter set as X Y Source X parameter set as logical channel where the temperature measurement is shown e of source Y parameter set as channel Source Y parameter set as logical channel named as Second level Precision parameter set as 0 0 Graph low parameter set as 50 Graph high parameter set as 85 A All other parameters should be set as default Logical channel 6 Calculating the time of the third alarm n Name parameter write Calc Third level Mode parameter set as Math function Click on the Function button Function parameter set as X Y e Source X parameter set as logical channel where the temperature measurement is shown e of source Y parameter set as channel Source Y parameter set as logical channel named as Third level Precision parameter set as 0
269. r num 1 PID Controller 1 Set point channel Log ch 2 Desired temp Feedback channel Log ch 1 Precision 0 Graph Lo 0 Graph Hi 300 all other parameters should be on default settings The last thing to do is set of SSR output Enter to the Device configuration menu then Built in outputs and select Output Out C1 SSR In this output set parameters as follows Mode PWM Source Log ch 3 PID controller Level mode value Lower level 0 Upper level 100 Alarm level 0 heater off if any error occurs Period 10sec Minimum ON Time 0 Minimum OFF Time 0 189 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 14 GROUPS General settings Logical channels Built in input Built in outputs External outputs Profiles timers Controllers MENU Device configuration TN Modbus Network settings Access options Groups are the sets of 1 6 Logical Channels collected together for clearance To see detailed definition of Group see Chapter 5 1 UNDERSTANDING CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER If the MultiCon has license for data logging then each Group is able to log the data coming from Logical channel included in this Group 7 14 1 Groups General settings Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allow switching between groups to configure settings of group parameters The middle button allows direct selection of specific group from th
270. r set as Hardware input Source parameter set as Inp A5 Voltage see the connection in Fig 7 57 press the Source configuration button to set the source configuration options e Mode parameter set as 0 10V because this voltage range it comes from voltage converter Low Limit parameter set as 0V e High Limit parameter set as 10V Scale parameter set as linear press Configure scaling button e Output unit parameter write V e in Input value parameter the Point 1 section write OV in Output value parameter in the Point 1 section write 0V e in Input value parameter in the Point 2 section write 10V in Output value parameter in the Point 2 section write 400V for Displaying block parameters Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 0 e in Graph low parameter write OV e Graph high parameter write 400V all other parameters should be on default settings 111 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Name Current Log channel Mode disabled Name Current Source configuration Unit Name 1 Current Mode Hardware input Unit mA Source Inp A1 Current Mode Current 0 20mA Low Limit 0 mA Processing disabled linear offset user char Displaying Scaling configuration Input unit mA Log chan gt Output unit Format nume
271. r the temperature in the first two channels we will use the PT1000 sensors and connections 3 wire and for the rest of PT100 and connections 2 and 4 wire We want to read the temperature from 4 sensors in one window in vertical bars mode In addition we want to log temperature every 1 minute for more details about logging see Chapter 7 14 2 Groups Logging options Solution Before measuring temperature user should configure the device and then connect the sensors as shown in Fig 7 65 see Appendix 8 7 RT4 RT6 RTD MEASUREMENT MODULES Office 5 4 input RTD Warehouse Power A depending on version RTD Basement SERVICE E RTD 3 J 4 24V DC 5 imax 200 ES WR ET Corridor F7 RS 485 8 isolated Fig 7 65 Schematic diagram for the RT4 module In first step you need to configure Logical channels To read the temperature from sensor 1 Bathroom touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any logical channel such as 30 in Name parameter write Bathroom Mode parameter set as Hardware input Source parameter set as Inp B1 R
272. rameter which displays measurement unit Mode defines measurement mode temperature or resistance Low limit defines measurement level bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state Digital inputs parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Mode defines input voltage ranges TTL 0 for 0 0 8V 1 for 2 5 5V and HTL 0 for 0 4 2V 1 for 11 5 30V 139 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Filter time defines minimal time that has to elapse from last input state change if this change wants to be noticed Each input has the possibility to sets its own Filter time even if this input is part of another different set of this parameter do not disturbs their work 7 9 5 3 Isolated current inputs module IS modules are equipped in six isolated current inputs with different ground potentials see Appendix 8 4 IS6 Isolated current inputs module Current inputs parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays measurement unit mA Mode defines measurement range Low limit defines measurement level be
273. rature stability 50 ppm C 50 ppm C Sampling period in mode current inputs voltage inputs thermocouple inputs RTD inputs resistance inputs 535ms 535ms 535ms 1410ms 1410ms 535ms 535ms 535ms 1410ms 1410ms Isolation strength 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC Weight 44g 73g Tab 8 13 Technical data for the UN3 and UN5 modules 247 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER limited range accuracy resolution full range full range accuracy limited range E lt C 200 1370 0 51 100 1370 0 27 50 1768 0 41 071768 0 34 210 1200 0 44 100 1200 0 23 200 400 0 31 100 400 0 20 200 1300 0 80 100 1300 0 42 50 1768 8 0 47 0 1768 0 31 200 1000 0 40 100 1000 0 25 200 800 0 44 100 800 0 28 250 1820 0 96 480 1820 0 45 m g Z 4A A N BRL N N N Tab 8 14 Thermocouple measurement accuracy for the UN3 and UN5 modules norm PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 PN EN 60584 1 1997 GOST R 8 585 2001 PN EN 60584 1 1997 m Z Z c lt Q Tab 8 15 Thermocouple norm for the UN3 and UN5 modules 248 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER type temperature range resolu
274. rdance with the text states set in the parameters Off state text channel value 0 and On state text channel value 1 in the Displaying parameter block b for enabled latch function For format numeric and time after pressing the button an edit window appears allowing entry of value see Fig 7 6 which enters the new value that isn t a data source for this channel but the value stored at the time of activation of the latch function in the edit window the value of the button still appears a new value which will be the data source for that logical channel by disabling the latch function binary pressing the button does not switch between the states 0 and 1 displayed in the data panel in accordance with the text states set in the parameters Off state text channel value 0 and On state text channel value 1 in the Displaying parameter block but with each new press of the button the state of button is stored in the buffer and set the value of logical channel with the currently stored state when the latch function is disabled again 01 Group Logic channel 2 Displaying CINNMENM o precision 0 00 E 99999 _ 99999 Graph owo Graph high 100 Logic channel 1 Format binary d Off state text IB On state text GW Graph low 0 Graph high 1 Fig 7 51 Manual operation of the button for numeric and binary format 93
275. recommended only in situation when to counter input is connected electronic input of other device 10 90 filter is active setting one of frequencies causes that input signals which duration corresponds to half of the selected frequency will be considered as a unwanted signal bounces and ignored Using this option is recommended when to counter input is connected contact output of the other device HM modules offers also possibility to measure programmable input state in binary format To measure those inputs user in Logical channel in Source parameter should choose one of the last inputs which module offers This measurement can be made regardless of the Prog Inp mode parfameter setting In this case the parameters are identical to digital inputs modules see Chapter 7 9 5 9 Optoisolated digital inputs modules 146 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 10 BUILT IN OUTPUTS General settings Logical channels Built in inputs MENU Device configuration Built in outpust External outputs Profiles timers Controllers Groups Modbus Network settings Access options Build in outputs menu is directly related to the available outputs installed in the device The basic version includes outputs built in Sound signal output is always marked as Out X1 Sound signal more about the Sound signal output see Chapter 7 10 2 Built in Output Relays Sound signal Virtual relays 16
276. rement and or output modules one slot marked as D used for advanced communication module additional USB Host RS 485 RS 485 RS 232 and Ethernet All measurement and output modules are optional and can be installed inside the device according to the customer s needs Input modules that can be installed 4 8 16 24x Voltage Current input module 16 24x NTC Voltage Current Digital mixed inputs module 6x Isolated current input module 4 6x RTD input module 4 8 12x TC input module 8 16 24x Optoisolated digital input 3 5x universal input module 2 4x universal counter module 2 4x hourmeter module 2 4x flowmeter input 2 4x current input module 2 4x pulse input 2 4x current input module Output modules that can be installed 8 16 24x SSR driver module 4 6x Relay module 5A 250V 8 12x Relay module 1A 250V 2 4 6 8x Passive current output module Full freedom of data sources presentation modes and controlling methods The multi level structure of the CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER firmware allows for selection of presented data sources presentation modes and controlling methods The CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER displays the values of virtual logical channels which can be fed with measurement data from built in physical channels measurement data from remote channels other devices connected to the CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER by RS 485 interface output states and quantities looped back results of controlling processes
277. rement ranges at producer s website Tab 8 4 Technical data for the UI4N8 UI4D8 UI8N8 and UI8D8 modules 234 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 4 IS6 ISOLATED CURRENT INPUTS MODULE IS6 6 isolated current input a 102 S 04 L n06 n07 o gt nds ao moj a n IN1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 Fig 8 8 lsolated current input module Most important parameters of 156 module IS6 Number of inputs exl Hardware limitations current inputs 3mA 30mA Hardware resolution current inputs 1uA Precision current inputs 0 25 25 235 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Covered CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges Internal impedance current inputs type 17500 4mA type 4000 20mA Temperature stability 65 ppm C Input voltage dropout lt 9V Signal polarization irrelevant absolute value measurement Protection current inputs 50mA auto reset fuse Sampling period 100ms Isolation strength 1 min 500V AC Weight 39g Measurement ranges are limited by software upon hardware inputs ability check current list of CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges at producer s website Tab 8 5 Technical data for the IS6 module Isolation Input 4 20mA LED current regulator 7 50
278. ric Precision 0 0 Name Voltage Unit V Mode Hardware input Source Inp A5 Voltage Configure source Processing Scaling linear Configure scaling Filter type disabled Displaying Format numeric Precision 0 0 Digits all digits Graph low 0 V Graph high 400 V Input value 0 mA Digits all digits Output value 0 A Graph low 0 A Graph high 5 A Input value 20 mA Output value 5 A Fig 7 58 Current and voltage source configuration example 112 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER For a power using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any logical channel such as 22 in Name parameter write Power Mode parameter set as Math function press the button next to the Function label to select the appropriate function that allows the calculation of the heater power 1 U Function parameter set as Type of source X parameter set as channel Source X parameter set as logical channel 20 which defined as a reading of the heater current Type of source Y parameter set as channel Source Y parameter set as logical channel 21 which is defined as reading of the heater voltage Scale parameter set as linear press Configure scaling button in Output unit parameter write kW in Input value parameter in the Point 1 section write O in Output value parameter in the Point 1 section
279. riggered by rising edge signal from values lt 0 to the value gt 0 come from source signal After the rising edge the Profile will be generated in whole once regardless of further changes to the signal source For more details see Chapter 7 12 2 Profiles timers Triggering mode level gate edge once edge retrig edge retrig this means that configured by user Profile will be triggered by rising edge signal from values s 0 to the value gt 0 that comes from source signal However in this mode unlike the edge once mode a defined Profile will be generated from the beginning every time when the Triggering source signal will generate an edge whether that Profile had been completed or not For more details see Chapter 7 12 2 Profiles timers Triggering mode level gate edge once edge retrig on time in this mode the Profile timer is generated in selected time using parameter Triggering times For more details see Chapter 7 12 3 Profiles timers Triggering mode on time Pause mode way to pause generated Profile timer disabled Profile timer can not be paused high level Profile timer will be paused when channel s value in Pause source parameter will be greater than zero gt 0 and will be resumed when this value will be lower or equal zero lt 0 If Profile timer is paused and new trigger will be User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER detected the Profile timer will remain
280. right corner of the screen allow you to switch between succession of logical channels middle button allows you to directly select a specific logical channel from the list The parameters of a logical channel depends on the Mode of the logical channel The Logical channel has modes disabled Hardware input Hardware output monitor Modbus Setpoint value Math function Controller Profile timer Profile timer cycle counter Data from other channel A detailed description of the models is in the following chapters 66 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER The channel for Mode disabled has only one parameter the name of the channel In other modes the Logical channels are active and may affect the processing and control data Parameters and blocks of parameters common for active Logical channels Name it gives the name to the logical channel Unit is related with a data source of channel e for Built in modules it will automatically use a default Unit for Mode Set point value and Mode Controller the Unit can be defined freely directly in the Logical Channel menu e for other modes the Unit can be added only using the Scaling parameter see below in this Chapter for discussion about the Scaling parameter Mode in this parameter the user selects the source of the data for logical channel It is possible to select one of ten modes e disabled
281. rs are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays C or mV depending on Mode parameter settings Mode allows to set thermocouple which is used to measurements or voltage measurement range Low limit defines measurement level bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state Wire compensation menu which allows to compensate measurement errors which can be caused by wrong sensor readings 142 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Compensation mode allows to choose parameter which will be used in compensation process disable compensation is not active manual allows to compensate sensor constant offset Compensation parameter which allows tu manually compensate sensor error written here value will be added or subtracted from measured sensor value automatic allows to compensate the difference between real temperature and that measured by the sensor Actual temperature parameter in which user enters actual temperature near the sensor which is measured by more reliable thermometer Compensate button which activates the compensation value which is written in Actual temperature parameter will be from no
282. rs from SLAVE device if connection to the SLAVE device is lost the device returns an error and displays the state ERR User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Output list submenu This submenu allows the user to edit the output channels registers to be written When at least one Output Channel is added to the list then an Output channel menu is displayed The parameters of the Output channels are Output active the output channel is defined but invisible in the External output menu see Chapter 7 11 EXTERNAL OUTPUTS e yes the output channel is defined and visible in the External output menu see Chapter 7 11 EXTERNAL OUTPUTS Control type e as a relay the output has two state low state value 0 and high state maximal value for 16 bit format is the value 65535 as a linear output can take any value depending of the settings in Output register and settings the parameters in the External outputs menu see Chapter 7 11 EXTERNAL OUTPUTS Output register submenu menu where user can set details of the Modbus register to be written see Chapter 7 15 3 3 Modbus MASTER Register settings 7 15 3 3 Modbus MASTER Register settings The submenu of registry settings in the Modbus protocol has the following fields Register type this parameter is only for the register settings in the Input list menu for the Output list menu the registers are HOLDING type a user can select two types
283. s standard which is not classified as group 2 equipment Group 2 contains all ISM RF equipment in which radio frequency energy in the frequency range 9 kHz to 400 GHz is intentionally generated and used or only used in the form of electromagnetic radiation inductive and or capacitive coupling for the treatment of material or inspection analysis purposes Carefully check that the isolation used with the unit Fig 4 1 meets the expectations and if necessary use appropriate measures of over voltage protection Additionally insure the appropriate air and surface insulation gaps when installing extemal sensor Measurement inputs RS 485 supply output interface and digital input Internal circuits Power supply Outputs circuits Isolation strength 1min 2300V AC Isolation strength 1min 500V AC ME No isolation Fig 4 1 Schematic diagram showing the isolation between individual circuits of the unit 4 1 UNPACKING After removing the unit from the protective packaging check for transportation damage Any transportation damage must be immediately reported to the carrier Also write down the unit serial number located on the housing and report the damage to the manufacturer Attached with the unit please find assembly brackets 2 pieces pointer for touch screen user s manual for CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER unit device in pdf 11 User Manua
284. s ports configuration and indication of the Modbus port connectors is located in Chapter 7 15 MODBUS Device this parameter is read only in External outputs menu it shows address and name of the SLAVE device configured in Modbus menu Chapter 7 15 3 Modbus MASTER mode Output channel this parameter is read only in External outputs menu it shows output channel number type of register and data format configured in Modbus menu each SLAVE device as defined in a specific address has its output list individually numbered Source this parameter contains Logical channels list where the selected logical channel will be data source for the external output Data from this source are calculated according to parameters in Input levels block and Output levels block Input levels parameter block data entered here have the same unit as selected logical channel source For this block parameters are Lower level it sets lower limit value below which source input signal will be equal to this value Upper level it sets upper limit value above which source input signal will be equal to this value Output levels parameter block this block has parameters Lower level it sets lower limit output signal value below which output signal will be equal to this value Upper level it sets lower limit output signal value below which output signal will be equal to this value e Alarm level it sets output value wh
285. s to configure appropriate parameters for the Controllers menu according to Example 7 13 2 1 Next is to configure logical channels as follows For demanding object temperature value touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any logical channel such as 1 in Name parameter write Setpoint Mode parameter set as Set point value in Unit parameter write C in Set point value write 85 C for Displaying block parameters 130 Format parameter set as numeric Precision parameter set as 0 in Graph low parameter write 0 C in Graph high parameter write 90 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER For reading temperature from PT100 sensor Fo touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any logical channel such as 2 in Name parameter write Feedback Mode parameter set as Hardware input Source parameters set as Inp A1 RTD see Fig 7 72 enter Configure source submenu e Mode parameter set as Pt100 in Low Limit parameter write 100 C e in High Limit write 600 C for Displaying block parameters e Format parameter set as numeric Precision parameters set as 0 0 in Graph low write 0 C e in Graph high write 100 C channel
286. s to set automatic shutdown of the device Mode turns on and off shutdown from logical channel o disable remote shutdown is off from log channel remote shutdown is Triggering source contains the logical channels list where selected one will be source for the remote shutdown the shutdown procedure will start each time when signal in selected channel will change from value x 0 to value gt 0 Delay settable time that will pass before the device will shutdown this procedure will be stopped if during this time signal in Triggering source parameter will drop to lt 0 value user will press cancel button on the screen User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER When device starts or when in Remote shutdown parameter block has been made any changes and in selected channel in Triggering source parameter is 1 value greater than 0 the shutdown procedure won t start To start shutdown procedure value in this channel must change to value equal or lower than 0 and then to value greater than 0 Setup list parameter After pressing the Setup list button the user enters the View menu allowing the creation of 1 to 20 views Arrows placed in the upper right corner of the screen allow you to move to the next view The middle button allows you to directly select a particular view Parameters of View menu are Display mode this parameter allows the user to select the presentation o
287. screen enter Configure scaling submenu e in Output unit write C in Input value parameter in the Point 1 section write 0 e Output value parameter in the Point 1 section write 0 C in Input value parameter in the Point 2 section write 20 e Output value parameter in the Point 2 section write 20 124 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER for Display block parameters e Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameter set as 0 0 in Graph low write 10 e in Graph high write 50 C using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any Logical channel such as 2 in Name parameter write Temperature 2 Mode parameter set as Modbus Port parameter set as MB1 MASTER SLAVE device parameter set as Addr 8 Temp converter Device input parameter set as Inp 2 HR 1h b0 15 that reads Register 1h from SLAVE 2 device all other parameters you should set like in previously configured logical channel In the next step you need to define Group the set up logical channels to view them in one window on the screen To do this enter the Group menu to enable the Group 1 if it is off in Name parameter write Temperature for Channels block parameters Slot 1 parameter set as logical channel 1 called the Temperature 1 Slot2 parameter set as logical channel 2 called the Temperature 2 e other parameters in this block Slot 3 6 set as disabled because we want to show only t
288. scription of configuration of the physical input is shown in Fig 4 9 Fig 4 21 and is dependent on specific measurement modules In the Built in inputs menu for the module the user can change the ranges covered depending on module see 8 APPENDICES change the connection method it depends on the module see Appendix 8 APPENDICES e g in the RTD module the user can select 2 3 and 4 wire connections change the type of reading of the input signal depending on the module e g a thermocouple module can read the temperature and voltage change operation of the module e g in counter module user can select function mode add mode Function mode A B subtract mode Function mode A B quadrature mode 1 Function mode quad 1 quadrature mode with increased resolution Function mode quad 4 Parameters common for built in inputs modules Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it description of the Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit it is related to channel source data for built in modules default unit appears automatically Mode sets type of measurement depending on module it sets measurement range or way of measurement Low Limit above this value in logical channel low alarm state appears displayed as Lo High Limit above this value in logical channel high alarm state appears displayed as Hi Other parameters of Built in inputs menu depend
289. see bellow in this chapter e reset allows to asynchronously reset hourmeter but Reset mode parameter has to be set as external or both in order to work it properly e inhibit allows to temporarily inhibit time counting Prog inp trig allows to define when the device should reset or inhibit hourmeter depending on Prog inp mode parameter settings 147 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER high level the device keeps counter in reset or inhibit state during high state on programmable input low level the device keeps counter in reset or inhibit state during low state on programmable input rising edge the device asynchronously resets the counter when rising edge occurs and Prog inp mode parameter is set as reset or inhibits the counter when rising edge occurs and Prog inp mode parameter is set as inhibit but in this case the counter will start counting again when on Start Stop input new trigger occurs falling edge the device asynchronously resets the counter when falling edge occurs and Prog inp mode parameter is set as reset or inhibits the counter when falling edge occurs and Prog inp mode parameter is set as inhibit but in this case the counter will start counting again when on Start Stop input new trigger occurs Filter sets filter on counter inputs which allows to getting rid of negative effects of signal bounces it has following parameters disable filter is inactive
290. select a file s of logged data from a group select the more files in the other groups if needed export selected files to flash drive and or delete selected logged data files 47 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Logging files Export selected files Delete selected files x File selection Group 01 Press to select Group 02 no items Fig 7 17 Logging files menu The Logging files menu is presented in Fig 7 17 The menu consists of buttons 46 Export files after pressing this button the selected logged files will be exported to a flash drive Delete files after pressing this button the selected logged files will be removed from the device Press to select next to the Damaged files label this button is visible if at least one damaged file exists when the user presses this button the window with a list of damaged files is dispayed the damaged logging files are those that contain errors caused by inappropriate shutdown the device during data logging There is no guarantee that this logged data will be readable Press to select next to Group number label if the user has enabled the logging of particular group of logical channels see Chapter 7 14 2 Groups Logging options in the Logging files menu next to the label of the group number appears the button Press to select Depending on how many groups the device can define 10 groups logging is enabled past or presen
291. settings in Controller mode touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any logical channel such as 32 in Name parameter write Controller Mode parameter set as Controller in Unit parameters write mA Controller number parameter set as Controller 1 Set point channel parameter set as logical channel 1 named Setpoint Feedback channel parameters set as logical channel 2 named Feedback for Displaying block parameters Format parameter set as numeric e Precision parameters set as 0 00 because with this precision we can send signal from controller to Current converter see Fig 7 72 e in Graph low write 0 e in Graph high write 10 For external output configuration sending via RS 485 see Chapter 7 11 4 Examples of external output configurations 131 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example 7 8 11 9 Application of Logical channel in the Profile timer mode see Chapter 7 12 PROFILES TIMERS Task Create the Profile timer in the logical channel 1 in the edge once triggering mode Trigger source is logical channel 2 which is connected to current input from Ul4 module Profile consists of 4 sections 1 ramp from 0 to 10 in 5 seconds 2 constant value 8 in 2 seconds 3 ramp from 8 to 4 in 3 seconds and 4 constant value 4 in 1 seconds Idle value is 0 and looping is disabled Solu
292. st value of a channel discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Processing parameter block is used for scaling and filtering data discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Displaying parameter block these parameters allow the user to select the format and range of data displayed on the screen discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Los charre PARAKI Name PID output Unit none Mode Hardware output moniti Source Out V7 VRelay Processing Fig 7 44 Input channels menu parameters specific for Hardware Output Monitor mode Source parameter in the Hardware output monitor mode After pressing Source a list of available hardware outputs appears The selected option will be the source of data for that logical channel An example list of available hardware outputs for the device with only one output module such as R81 8 relay outputs module see Appendix 8 13 R45 R81 R65 R121 RELAY MODULES is shown in Fig 7 45 Source for the Hardware output monitor mode can be in the same order as in the list in device see Fig 7 45 installed hardware output modules in the respective slots A B or C see Fig 4 8 alist of modules currently available is on the website more about the output modules in Chapter 7 10 BUILT IN OUTPUTS built in Sound signal output is always mar
293. surement level bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state NTC temperature or resistance measurement inputs parameters are For temperature mode Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays measurement unit C Mode defines measurement mode temperature or resistance Low limit defines measurement level bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state NTC Equation allows to choose method of entering thermistor characteristic There are two possibilities e equation with Beta parameter where resistance in reference temperature Beta parameter reference temperature in Centigrades equation based on Steinhart Hart coefficients l A B In R C In R Measurement range which will be displayed is calculated based on equations above In the second place Low limit and High limit parameters are taken into consideration when determining displayed range For resistance mode Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit pa
294. t as many Press to select buttons will be active Group 01 Select ome many options EA Fig 7 18 A sample view of selected logged files from Group 1 2011 01 27 16 20 25 eStart 2011 01 27 10 23 27 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER In Fig 7 18 presents a sample view of selected logged files from Group 1 The numbers refer to 1 group number 2 the selected logged file 3 no description for the logged file 4 description defined by the user a description of the logged file is defined in the Groups menu see Chapter 7 14 2 Groups Logging options 5 date and time of the end of the logged data file 6 date and time of the start of the logged data file 7 date and time of the start of the logged data file whose logging has not yet ended An example of exporting the logged data to a flash drive An example of exporting 2 logged files from group 1 is shown in Fig 7 19 First plug the flash drive into the device when the device is equipped with one of the communication modules n step 1 press the button Press to select next to the Group 01 label step 2 select 2 files by pressing the selected files and then choose the button to accept e File 1 Name no description Start 2010 12 01 3 24 58 p m stop 2010 12 01 4 34 11 p m e File 2 Name Ambient temperature Start 2010 12 03 9 53 15 a m
295. t data is outside the defined range at the output high state appears Hysteresis defining this parameter the user can move the level for changes in output state see Fig 7 80 and Fig 7 81 A Alarm level this parameter is only visible for PWM mode allows the user to enter value of fill of the pulse in times of alarm state for more information see Chapter 7 10 3 Build in output PWM Pulse width modulation mode for SSR relay output Output A Level parameter state measurement Hysteresis parameter Fig 7 80 One threshold control of the relay outputs 152 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Lower level Upper level Output parameter state pM ysteresis parameter Fig 7 81 Two threshold control of the relay outputs Output Levels Level mode value Level mode value Level 8 mA Lower level 2 mA Hysteresis 0 5 mA Upper level 10 mA Hysteresis 0 5 mA v Timing Fig 7 82 Levels settings for Mode above and bellow level left and inside range and outside range right Timing parameter block see Fig 7 85 The parameters of this block include delay this parameter allows the setting of the time that must pass from the time of exceeds Level value until the output switch from low to high state see Fig 7 83 OFF delay this parameter allows the user to set the time that must pass from the time
296. t from the list For 2 points the user characteristic works like a linear process see subsection b For more than 2 defined points the user characteristic is a composite of the line characteristics therefore for input value x the user obtain an output value y which is described by the relationship y slope x r offset where slope and offset are coefficients of a segment contained between two points see Fig 7 34 and n 1 2 is the number of the segment 1 If the input exceeds the extreme x values of the designated points of Pn the output 70 value is scaled by the functions defined at the extreme segments 5 interval characteristics 4 4 14 Y4 32 P2 X2 7 2 25 3 10 Y3 25 Output value P5 X5218 Y5 0 1 1 0 Y120 Input value Fig 7 34 Example of user characteristic User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example Steps to create a user characteristic consisting of 6 points like on Fig 7 34 1 Press the button next to the Scaling label and select user characteristic option point 1 and 2 in Fig 7 35 2 Press the Configure scaling button and enter the Scaling configuration menu point 3 in Fig 7 35 3 f you want to create an output Unit which replaces the input unit or if no unit is defined on the input press the button next to Output Unit label 4 Press the Edit points button point 4 in Fig 7 35
297. t is strongly recommended to use a special stylus made of plastic or another soft material with round ends for example the pionter delivered with the device or a finger The display of the CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER should also be protected against aggressive substances and extremely high and low temperature see technical data in Chapter 3 TECHNICAL DATA A To clean the LCD screen you should use a special detergent designed for LCDs and a soft cloth 6 3 DISPLAY The CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER displays all data and dialogue on a 3 5 or 5 7 320x240 pixel color TFT screen with embedded touch screen panel New devices have the display protected with a thin transparent plastic cover This protective layer should be removed before use to ensure perfect visibility of pictures and sensitivity of the touch screen While normal operation the CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER displays data in a form selected by user at any time it is possible to switch presentation mode and group or show configuration menu All details of the user interface are designed to make use of device easy and intuitive To change display mode group or to enter the menu touch the screen of the CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER and press appropriate button in the Navigation bar 1 Further information about menu and presentation modes are described in further chapters 36 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Information bar Chapter 6 3 1 04 Group 4 2011 01 27 Data
298. t value parameter see Fig 7 50 enabled this button is active in this case the data source of logical channel will be the value set after pressing the button but the initial value is the number written in Set point value parameter before setting the Edit button parameter to enabled Button mode parameter is visible only in case when Edit button parameter is set on enabled and Format parameter in Displaying parameter block is set on binary it has two options e bistable pressing and releasing the button will cause permanent change of state monostable pressing and releasing the button will cause that the button on 0 1 second will switch from OFF state to ON state and after that time it will switch again to OFF state 91 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Latch parameter block allows user to set the latch function which will hold the last value of a channel discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Displaying parameter block for these parameters the user select format and range of data to be displayed on the screen discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings 01 Group Area of data panel for Logical channel Button area A Touch amp hold 2 3 sec data panel to inside into logical channel configuration Touch amp hold 2 3 sec button to inside into logical channel configuration Touch button to edit or change the va
299. te Remote display a Export manual Service options v Fig 7 27 Device information menu Remote display mode should not be used for normal device work but only for its configuration d User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 5 DEVICE CONFIGURATION Device configuration Fig 28 The device configuration menu The Device configuration menu is the main menu of the device that allows the user to configure all inputs and outputs of the device to measure and control the system To prevent accidental or unauthorized change the settings in the Device configuration menu the user can set the access protection see Chapter 7 17 ACCESS OPTIONS If this option is set before entering each submenu the user will be requested to enter the password More information about selected sub menus is described in further Chapters To exit the main menu press the button located in the upper right corner of the screen Due to the fact that the configuration process takes place in real time all changes must be confirmed before saving them In the confirmation window you can Save or Revert changes see Fig 7 30 There is a possibility to press the button again In that case warning message will appear see Fig 7 31 and the user must choose to save new configuration or go to main screen with unsaved but active configuration If second option is chosen the icon gt Will be displayed on the information bar th
300. te a selected object Tab 7 1 Button functions common for different views 45 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 2 MAIN MENU SELECTION PANEL Pressing the MENU button on the Navigation bar see Chapter 6 3 2 Navigation bar enters the main selection panel see Fig 7 13 This panel allows users to select between entering the Device Configuration menu Files management menu and Device Information window Further information about the different menus are described in further chapters MENU Chapter 7 5 gt Device configuration Chapter 7 3 lr Chapter 7 4 gt T Device information safe shutdown Fig 7 13 Main menu window The Safe shutdown button allow for a safe power down of the device After pressing the button and accepting the warning message the screen will look like in the Fig 7 14 Now the user can power off the device The manufacturer recommends turning off the device this way This method is especially recommended when data logging is enabled Not complying with these instructions could cause loss of recently logged data samples IT 15 NOW SAFE TO POWER OFF DEVICE Fig 7 14 The view of the screen after pressing the Safe shutdown button 46 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 3 FILES MANAGEMENT gt Files management Fig 7 15 This button allows to entry to the files management menu After pressing MENU Files management
301. tended description Register blocks parameter block see Chapter 7 15 3 4 for extended description 7 15 3 1 Modbus MASTER Device templates parameter block This block is composed of 2 buttons Load device template this button allows to load a template with predefined blocks of input and or output registers Pressing this button invokes a file selection window After successful loading of the template an extended list of SLAVE device parameters will appear see below for details Templates can be imported into the MultiCon using a File Management menu and also created by the user using Save device template button after fully configuration of a slave device Save device template allows the user to save a configured SLAVE device as a template for further usage Saved template can be used for fast copying moving of the SLAVE device to another address use Load device template easy creation of similar SLAVE devices by loading the template in another address and modification of parameters easy moving exchange of templates between different MultiCon devices using File Management menu 208 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER An example of Modbus template selection window is shown in Fig 7 127 Below this figure additional icons are described 2 5 07 Ey eats ELE Fig 7 127 Template selection window This button invokes software keyboard window allowing write or search the
302. th of the rectangle on the screen is defined by pressing the Spacebar empty string and the color of the rectangle is the background color for example Digits this parameter occurs when Format parameter is set as numeric allowing user to choose the part of the number that is to be the value of the logical channel displayed on the screen User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example of a number representing the value of the logical channel 1 2 5 6 2 8 0 2 2 1 5 8 6 4 8 7 3 E PALM vC vC k d part 1 of 3 part 2 of 3 part 3 of 3 2 24 part 1 of 2 part 2 of 2 all digits limited ability to display up to 5 digits plus decimal point on the screen Available options for Digits parameter are e digits display all parts With this option the number is limited only to possibilities of the display part 1 of 2 display the higher part of the number on the screen e part2 of 2 display the lower part of the number on the screen e part1 of 3 display the highest part of the number the screen e part2 of 3 display the middle part of the number on the screen e part 3 of 3 display the lowest part of the number on the screen For time Format in logical channel only 6 digits three special signs colons dot but not more than eight signs and minus Using Digits and Precision parameters the device will display time fro
303. tion First configure the device as follows Then connect current converter to the UI4 module as it is shown in Fig 8 37 see also Appendix 8 2 Ul4 UI8 UI12 U16 U24 116 124 VOLTAGE and CURRENT MEASUREMENT MODULES 12 10 Value 8 6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Time 7 73 Example of Profile waveform For logical channel in Profile timer mode touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter Logical channels menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select any logical channel such as 1 in Name parameter write Profile Mode parameter set as Profile timer Source parameter set as P T1 Profile 1 press Configure source button Mode parameter set as edge once e Triggering source parameter set as Log ch 2 in Idle value parameter write 0 press Section list button press green button on the bottom left side of the screen Section num parameter should be set as 1 in Duration parameter write O Unit parameter set as second Shape parameter set as slope Final value parameter write 10 132 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER press green button on the bottom left side of the screen Section num parameter should be set as 2 in Duration parameter write 2 Unit parameter set as second Shape parameter set as const value Final value parameter write 8 press
304. tion accuracy accuracy 7o Pt100 100 600 0 01 0 14 Pt500 100 600 0 1 0 3 Pt1000 100 600 0 1 0 14 Pt 50 200 600 0 01 0 25 Pt 100 200 600 0 01 0 12 Pt 500 200 600 0 1 0 25 Cu50 50 200 0 01 0 73 100 50 200 0 01 0 37 50 200 200 0 01 0 4 Cu 100 200 200 0 01 0 2 100 60 180 0 01 0 3 1500 60 180 0 1 0 58 1000 60 180 0 1 0 3 Tab 8 16 RTD measurement accuracy for the UN3 and UN5 modules type norm Pt100 PN EN 60751 2009 Pt500 PN EN 60751 2009 Pt1000 PN EN 60751 2009 Pt 50 GOST 6651 94 W100 1 3910 Pt 100 GOST 6651 94 W1o00 1 3910 Pt 500 GOST 6651 94 Wio00 1 3910 Cu50 GOST 6651 94 W1o00 1 3910 Cu100 GOST 6651 94 Wio00 1 3910 Cu 50 PN 83M 53852 Wio 71 4280 Cu 100 PN 83M 53852 W100 71 4280 Ni100 PN EN 60751 2009 Ni500 PN EN 60751 2009 Ni1000 PN EN 60751 2009 Tab 8 17 RTD norm for the UN3 and UN5 modules 249 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER R 100k n01 n02 o P DS F 50mA n03 o R 3 3M n04 M ring
305. tions We can use this mode to copy logical channel read the value from a source which has more than one quantity of output value e g Fl4 input module has 2 output quantities flow and balance to be able to display all possible quantities defined in the logical channel The parameters of the Logical channel in Data from other channel mode should be Name it gives the name to the logical channel Unit the unit downloaded from the source logical channel to change the unit use the Scaling parameter in the Processing parameter block for more information see Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Mode Data from other channel in this parameter the user selects the source of data for the logical channel Source this parameter allows the user to select a logical channel from the list the selected option will be the data source for this logical channel Quantity some modules can return more than one measured quantity e g F14 input module has 2 output elements flow and balance This parameter allows to choose one to display Latch parameter block allows the user to set the latch function which will hold the last value of a channel discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Processing parameter block is used for scaling and filtering data discussed in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings 109 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Displaying parameter b
306. to add a view between the existing views e g between views 2 and 3 user can choose two ways e select the 2nd view by the arrows in the upper right corner of the screen and then add a new view by clicking the Add a new view button e after adding new view on the end of the list the Move to position parameter set as 3 value 6 When finished the user can see all the defined views by clicking the middle button between the arrows in the upper right corner of the screen 65 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 8 LOGICAL CHANNELS General settings MENU Device configuration p Logical channels Built in inputs Built in outputs External outputs Profiles timers Controllers Groups Modbus Network settings Access options The Logical channels menu is used to configure the logical channels Channels can be treated as input data for outputs controllers or other Logical channels and can be collected into Groups for simultaneous display To see a detailed definition of Logical Channel see Chapter 5 1 1 Logical channels To enter directly into the configuration menu of particular channel press and hold on the screen over the channel data panel for a few seconds see option 1 in the Fig 6 5 If the password is set see Chapter 7 17 ACCESS OPTIONS then the user has to enter the password before entering the configuration 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Arrows placed in the upper
307. to the real measurement accuracy it is recommended to set the temperature display accurate to one decimal place Check current list of CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measurement ranges at producer s website Tab 8 10 Technical data for the RT4 and RT6 modules temperature type range C 7o Pt100 100 600 0 01 t 0 14 Pt500 100 600 0 1 0 3 Pt1000 100 600 0 1 0 14 Pt 50 200 600 0 01 0 25 Pt 100 200 600 0 01 0 12 Pt 500 200 600 0 1 0 25 50 50 200 0 01 0 73 100 50 200 0 01 0 37 50 200 200 0 01 0 4 100 200 200 0 01 0 2 Ni100 60 180 0 01 0 3 Ni500 60 180 0 1 0 58 Ni1000 60 180 0 1 0 3 resolution accuracy accuracy Tab 8 11 Measurement accuracy for the RT4 and RT6 modules 243 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER type norm Pt100 PN EN 60751 2009 Pt500 PN EN 60751 2009 Pt1000 PN EN 60751 2009 Pt 50 GOST 6651 94 W os 1 3910 Pt 100 GOST 6651 94 W os 1 3910 Pt 500 GOST 6651 94 W10 1 3910 Cu50 GOST 6651 94 W 1o0 1 3910 Cu100 GOST 6651 94 W 1o0 1 3910 Cu 50 PN 83M 53852 Wio 1 4280 Cu 100 PN 83M 53852 Wio 71 4280 Ni100 PN EN 60751 2009 Ni500 PN EN 60751 2009 Ni1000 PN EN 60751 2009 Tab 8 12 RTD norm for the RT4 and RT6 modules 244 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 8 UN3 UN5 OPTOISOLATED UNIVE
308. ty the empty position remain empty so that in contrast to the disabled position it doesn t reduce the number of position to deploy in the display window A Logical channel user can select one of all available Logical channels which will be displayed in the specific location on the screen e Style defines color which will be used to draw logical channel selected in this Slot User can specify font color in channel except value color and drawing color of all elements connected with channel visualisation see Fig 7 121 Using black X buttons user can return to default settings Logging options parameter block logging options are available only in the device having a license for logging the data for more information about the logging license is in Chapter 7 4 DEVICE INFORMATION LICENCE FIRMWARE UPDATE REMOTE DISPLAY EXPORT MANUAL AND RENEW CONFIGURATION parameters of this block shown and described in the Chapter 7 14 2 Groups Logging options 193 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER ZEN Group enabled 5 CUA LEICA EA Display options G 01 Hall temperature 2011 0201 Sector 1 omm Elex Bien lea 57 35 20 69 35 24 Charts horizontal Bars horizontal Line width 2 pixels Name Hall temperature Time scale 19 sec ictor 6 p gt Background white 07 57 50 07 57 55 07 58 00 07 58 05 07 Ea cll 15 SOE SCREEN GEI RAO E
309. ue of the signal see Fig 7 37 After selecting this option Filter conf button will appear which contains configuration parameters of this filter e Mode allows to choose filter work mode peaks function detects highest values in logical channel valleys function detects lowest values in logical channel e Value the peak will be detected when signal value will drop or rise for value in this parameter Hold time the time which the detected peak will be hold under condition that there will be no new peak detected e Reset mode turns on and off reset of the peak value from logical channel disabled reset form logical channel is off log channel allows to select a logical channel in which value that is higher than O will reset the peak detect e Reset source it contains the logical channels list where selected on will be for the peak detect source of reset 4 measure Hold time Hold time real measurement result time display value Fig 7 37 Process of peak detection 73 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Displaying parameter block The constant parameters of Displaying block are 74 Format the logical channel data formats which are e numeric value in this channel is displayed as a number e binary only for values 0 for low state and 1 for high state e time value in this channel is displayed as a time Logical channel in
310. ultiCon device in SLAVE mode This data stored in the logical channel in Modbus mode can be display on screen processed by other logical channels e g by mathematical function or virtual relay or it can be the data source for controlling an output Log channel SLAVE device Addr 1 SCK 10 Device input Inp 1 HR 1h b 0 15 A Mode Modbus Port MB1 MASTER i Port MB1 Multicon in MASTER mode for this port Modbus address 1 Device name SCK 10 Input channel number 1 HOLDING Register 1h size b 0 15 Fig 7 46 Sample Logical channel setting in Modbus mode The parameters of Logical channel in Modbus mode are see Fig 7 46 88 it gives the name to the logical channel Unit to create a unit use the Scaling parameter in Processing parameter block more information see Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings Mode Modbus in this parameter the user selects source type of data for logical channel Port this parameter allows the user to select a serial ethernet port from the list The basic version of MultiCon has one built in RS 485 port The number of serial ports can be increased by installing a communication module into slot D of the device This module offers 2 additional serial ports one RS 485 and one RS 485 RS 232 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER and one ethernet port which allows for an advanced Multi Modbus system see Fig 7 47 Slave
311. umn is channel ID channel number 1 in decimal notation In second column channel 3 ID 2 is in LO state inf channel 4 ID 3 is in HI state inf and channel 5 ID 4 is in ERR state nan 269 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Channels settings data format Text data have following columns channel ID channel number 1 name selected data source index see Mode parameter in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings unit channel unit or if there is no unit available none translated into current device language label format index see Format parameter in Chapter 7 8 1 Logical Channels General settings ON label OFF label channel HI level channel LO level number precision text data describing selected number precision e g 0 00 mean two decimal digits Example channel 1 and 2 settings 0 Channel C1 1 none 1 ON OFF 10 0 0 00 1 Channel C2 1 mA 0 ON OFF 20 0 00 Channel one have name Channel C1 it is in mode 1 Hardware input have no unit format is set to 1 binary mode label ON is ON label OFF is OFF channel HI state is set to 10 and LO state to 0 precision is 0 00 two decimal digits When viewing the data in a text editor do not be fooled by the apparent different number of columns Tabs can be presented differently depending on user s text editor It is recommended that the user en
312. ut TTL digital input HTL digital input type type type type 0 5V 1 5V 0 10V 2 10 0 20 4 20mA 4 20mA 0 100 0 110 0 6V 0 6V 0 12V 0 12V 0 20 0 5V 1 5V 0 10V 2 10V 0 20mA 4 20mA Lo 0 0 8V Hi 2 5 5V Lo 0 4 2V Hi 11 5 30V 0 5V 1 5V 0 10V 2 10 0 20 4 20mA 4 20mA 0 100 0 110 0 6V 0 6 0 12V 0 12V 0 20 0 5V 1 5V 0 10V 2 10 0 20 4 20mA Lo 0 0 8 Hi 2 5 5V Lo 0 4 2V Hi 11 5 30 Temperature stability 50 ppm C 50 ppm C 50 ppm C 50 ppm C Input impedance voltage input current input resistance input digital input 61kO 1000 80kQ 61kQ 1000 80kQ Protection voltage input current input resistance input digital input protection resistor 50mA auto reset fuse protection resistor protection resistor 50mA auto reset fuse protection resistor protection resistor 50mA auto reset fuse protection resistor protection resistor 50mA auto reset fuse protection resistor Sampling period ca 100ms ca 100ms ca 100ms ca 100ms Isolation strength 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC 1 min 500V AC Weight 51 5g 51 5g 63 5g 63 5g 233 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Measurement ranges are limited by software upon hardware inputs ability check current list of CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER measu
313. ution For Current output configuration touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the Built in outputs menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select a current output on which we want to generate current in demanded range e g Out C1 Current Source parameter set as Logical channel 1 which returns pressure value in range 100 500 bars for Input levels parameter block e in Lower level write 100 bars in Upper level write 500 bars for Output levels parameter block in Lower level parameter write 4 mA Upper level parameter write 20 mA in Alarm level parameter write 4 mA which means that when Logical channel 1 will be in alarm state Err Hi or Lo then on current output will be 4 mA User should remember that Current output is passive which means it needs to be powered from current loop Fig 8 29 Is showing how to do it Output polarization in IO modules is irrelevant 161 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 11 EXTERNAL OUTPUTS General settings Logical channels Built in inputs Built in outputs MENU Device configuration External outputs Profiles timers Controllers Groups Modbus Network settings Access options The External outputs menu is related to sending the date to SLAVE device using Modbus communication protocol In this menu it is determined what data will be send to SLA
314. utputs To do this touch screen and press the Menu button press the Device configuration button enter the External outputs menu using the arrows in the top navigation bar select Ext out 1 it is linear output there are three constant parameters which are consistent Modbus menu configuration e Comm port MB2 MASTER e Device Addr 5 Flowmeter e Output channel Out 1 HR 2h 1 b 0 31 for next parameters e Source parameter set as logical channel named as Set point value e for Input levels block parameters Lower level parameter write 0 Upper level parameter write 65535 e for Output levels block parameters Lower level parameter write 0 Upper level parameter write 65535 in Alarm level parameter write 0 using the arrows in the top navigation bar select Ext out 2 it is relay output there are three constant parameters which are consistent Modbus menu configuration e Comm port MB2 MASTER e Device Addr 5 Flowmeter Output channel Out 2 HR 4h b 0 for next parameters e Mode parameter set as above level because we want the valve to switch on when value will be greater O Source parameter set as logical channel namer Valve position Alarm state parameter set as immed OFF which means that when logical channel 2 will be returning Err Hi or Lo state the output will be in low state valve is off e for Levels block parameters Lev
315. vice Logout Mo Y es Fig 7 136 User logout window Button which calls the keyboard allowing to type user s password Settings of single level access protection are stored in main configuration file They are also copied to another devices together with main configuration file Settings of MultiLevel Access protection have to be saved in independent file They are not stored in main configuration file They also cannot be removed by restoring default configuration as it is shown in Chapter 7 4 DEVICE INFORMATION LICENCE FIRMWARE UPDATE REMOTE DISPLAY EXPORT MANUAL AND RENEW CONFIGURATION The only way to transfer those settings to another device is save them on external memory as independent permission file see Chapter 7 3 FILES MANAGEMENT 224 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 8 APPENDICES A All connections must be made while power supply is disconnected 8 1 PS3 PS4 PS42 POWER SUPPLY MODULE N Power supply N Power supply N Power supply 19V 50V DC 85V 260V AC DC 85V 260V AC DC 16V 35V AC SERVICE i SERVICE NL Jn D 24V DC 5 ND 24V DC 596 24V DC 5 Imax 200mA 4 Imax 200mA Imax 200mA 5 digital input 5 P digital input digital input 0 15 24V 0 15 24V DC 0 15 24V DC _6 1 B RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 isolated isolated isolated Fig 8 1 Power supply module PS3 left side PS4 and PS
316. w on used for compensation Compensation read only parameter displays voltage value calculated to compensate temperature measurement User should remember that after changing the sensor new settings in Wire compensation menu should be made Connectors temperature input parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 Unit parameter which displays C Mode parameter which displays Temp of connectors Low limit defines measurement level bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High limit defines measurement level above which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state Offset parameter which allows to add or subtract constant value to temperature measured by connectors temperature sensor 7 9 5 7 RTD measurement modules RT modules are equipped in four or six RTD inputs see Appendix 8 7 RT4 RT6 RTD MEASUREMENT MODULES These inputs are used for temperature measurement using RTD type temperature sensors by two three and four wire method or for resistance measurement in ranges up to 3kO RT modules cooperates with many kind of resistance thermometers and thanks to this there is no need to change the module when sensor has been changed user only needs to change settings in module RT modules parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by t
317. w switching between addresses of SLAVE devices The middle button allows direct selection of specific address from the list If the particular address is not used then a short menu is displayed Device type turns on and off selected address not present means that this address is not used in other words there is no SLAVE device with this address connected e defined after selecting this option an extended list of SLAVE device parameters will appear see below in this Chapter for details Load device template this button allows to load a template with predefined blocks of input and or output registers Pressing this button invokes a file selection window After successful loading of the template an extended list of SLAVE device parameters will appear see below for details Templates can be imported into the MultiCon using a File Management menu and also created by the user using Save device template button after fully configuration of a slave device If the Device type is set to defined or a Template has been loaded then extended SLAVE device menu is shown This menu as following fields Device type defined Device name to create or change the name of a SLAVE device press the button next to the Device name label and enter the name using displayed editor Device templates parameter block see Chapter 7 15 3 1 for extended description Device channels parameter block see Chapter 7 15 3 2 for ex
318. ware Fig 6 12 Information message Settings will be overwritten Do you want to continue Yes No Fig 6 13 Question message Flash disk write error Try again Fig 6 14 Warning message 42 Fig 6 15 Alert message User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 CONFIGURATION OF THE CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER 7 1 EDIT DIALOGUES Configuration process are based on edit dialogues Some of the dialogues are common to different menus such dialogues are text editor which is divided into tabs letters see Fig 7 1 numbers and arithmetic signs see Fig 7 2 the special symbols see Fig 7 3 diacritical letters Fig 7 4 font and background colors see Fig 7 5 values editor which is divided into tabs decimal form see Fig 7 6 hexadecimal form see Fig 7 7 binary form see Fig 7 8 switch editor which is divided single choice type options see Fig 7 9 multiple choice type options see Fig 7 10 file editor which is divided single file selection see Fig 7 11 multiple files selection see Fig 7 12 Channel 1 l EN NS EN EJ 3 E EN 7679 Fig 7 1 Text editor letters Fig 7 2 Text editor numbers x p qp oO keki BOE Bao BBHB BBBB HEE EEEE HEEE gt vt Je Channel 1 i FL Ele BREE
319. width modulation mode for SSR relay output 155 7 10 4 Built in output Current outfput 20 7 10 5 Examples of build in output configurations 159 RN 4I D NES PRRO 162 7 11 1 External outputs General nnns 162 7 11 2 External outputs Control type as a relay nnns 164 7 11 3 External outputs Control type as a linear outfput 166 7 11 4 Examples of external output configurations 168 PU PROFILES TIMERS MM TET 7 12 1 Profile timer General TIT 7 12 2 Profiles timers Triggering mode level gate edge once edge retrig 175 7 12 3 Profiles timers Triggering mode on TIT 7 12 4 Examples of Profile timer 179 FIS CONTROLLERS E eee mean 183 7 13 1 Controllers General 5 183 7 13 2 Examples of Controller configurations esses esee nnns 186 1 ce
320. wn Filter time even if this input is part of another different set of this parameter do not disturbs their work 7 9 5 10 Optoisolated universal counters modules CP modules can be equipped in two or four universal counters inputs see Appendix 8 10 CP2 4 OPTOISOLATED UNIVERSAL COUNTERS MODULES Each counter can be configured individually and is equipped with two counting inputs Inp n 1 Inp n 2 programming input Prog n reset input Res n where n means counter number from 1 to 4 Counters parameters are Name each built in input already has a name given by the device and user cannot change it for description of Name parameter see Fig 7 74 A Unit read only parameter it is Pulses Low Limit value determining amount of pulses bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Lo state High Limit value determining amount of pulses bellow which in logical channel will be displayed Hi state Function mode specifies the pulse counting e every rising edge on both inputs increments counter value e every rising edge on input 1 increments counter value and every rising edge on input 2 decrements counter value e quad 1 counter becomes an encoder element used to measure pulses on inputs using quad method Direction of counter value changes depends on input 2 state 0 down 1 up and counting take place when on input 1 rising edge appears 145 User Manual For CON
321. wo logical channels all other parameters should be on default settings The last step is to define the Initial view displayed on the LCD screen the device starts Initial View has to display a defined Group of logical channels 1 2 in values mode To do this enter General settings menu for Initial view block parameters e Display mode parameter set as values e Displayed group parameter set as Group 1 Temperature After whole configuration exit the menu pressing Save changes the result will be visible as soon as first measurement is done 125 User Manual For CONTROLLER DATA RECORDER Example 7 8 11 6 Application of Logical channel in the Hardware input see 8 6 TC4 TC8 TC12 THERMOCOUPLE SENSOR MEASUREMENT MODULES mode and Math function mode see Chapter 7 8 6 Logical Channels Math function mode Task In this example we calculate the mean value from logic channels 1 8 In these channels are values from thermocouple sensors that are located around the furnace Solution Before measuring temperature user should configure the device as follows and then connect the thermocouple sensors to the device An example of the connection is shown in Fig 7 70 see also Appendix 8 6 TC4 TC8 TC12 THERMOCOUPLE SENSOR MEASUREMENT MODULES Thermocouple Power supply depending on version

CONTROLLER/DATA RECORDER

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents